Untitled record
59 claims: 59 independent, 0 dependent
- 11- عملية لتحضير صورة جرعة صلبة solid dosage form صيدلانية ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release للإعطاء عن طريق الفم oral، تشتمل على الأقل على الخطوات التالية:(أ) دمج على الأقل (1) polyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل، بناء على قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، والوزن الجزيئي التقريبي approximate molecular weight لـ 1.000.000 على الأقل، و (2) عامل نشط active agent واحد على الأقل، لتكوين تركيبة؛ (ب) تشكيل التركيبة لتشكيل صيغة طبقة ذات إطلاق ممتد ؛ و (ج) معالجة curing صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ممتدة الاطلاق المذكورة تشتمل على الأقل على خطوة معالجة curing step بتعريض صيغة الطبقة ممتدة الاطلاق إلى درجة حرارة هي على الأقل درجة حرارة تطرية softening temperature polyethylene oxide المذكور لفترة زمنية تصل إلى حوالي دقيقة على الأقل.
- 22- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية 1، حيث يتم في الخطوة ج) تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ممتدة الاطلاق extended release إلى درجة حرارة هي على الأقل درجة حرارة تطرية softening temperature polyethylene oxide المذكور لفترة زمنية تصل إلى حوالي 5 دقائق.
- 33- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (1)، حيث يتم في الخطوة ج) تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة هي على الأقل درجة حرارة تطرية softening temperature polyethylene oxide المذكور لفترة زمنية تصل إلى حوالي 15 دقيقة على الأقل.
- 44- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (1) أو (2)، أو (3)، حيث يتم في الخطوة ب) تشكيل التركيبة composition shaped لتشكيل صيغة طبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release في صورة قرص form tablet.
- 55- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (4)، حيث يتم في الخطوة (ب) تشكيل التركيبة composition shaped بطريقة الكبس المباشر direct compression للتركيبة المذكورة.
- 66- العملية وفقاً لأي عنصر حماية من (1) إلى (5)، حيث يتم في الخطوة ج) تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تصل على الأقل إلى حوالي 60 ْم أو على الأقل حوالي 62 ْم، وبصورة مفضل على الأقل حوالي 68 ْم، على الأقل حوالي 70 ْم، أو على الأقل حوالي 72 ْم أو على الأقل حوالي 75 ْم.
- 77- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (6)، حيث يتم تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تتراوح بين حوالي 62 ْم إلى حوالي 90 ْم، ومن حوالي 65 ْم إلى حوالي 90 ْم، أو من حوالي 68 ْم إلى حوالي 90 ْم.
- 88- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (6)، حيث يتم تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تصل على الأقل إلى حوالي 62 ْم أو على الأقل حوالي 68 ْم لفترة زمنية تتراوح بين دقيقة إلى حوالي 3 ساعات.
- 99- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (6)، حيث يتم تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تصل على الأقل إلى حوالي 62 ْم أو على الأقل حوالي 68 ْم لفترة زمنية تصل إلى حوالي 15 دقيقة.
- 1010- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (6)، حيث يتم تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تصل على الأقل إلى حوالي 60 ْم أو على الأقل حوالي 62 ْم، والأفضل عند حوالي 68 ْم على الأقل، وحوالي 70 ْم على الأقل، وحوالي 72 ْم على الأقل، وحوالي 75 ْم على الأقل، أو من حوالي 62 ْم إلى حوالي 85 ْم لفترة زمنية تصل إلى حوالي 15 دقيقة؛ أو حوالي 30 دقيقة أو حوالي 60 دقيقة أو حوالي 90 دقيقة على الأقل.
- 1111- العملية وفقاً لأي عنصر حماية من (1) إلى (10)، حيث يتم تعريض صيغة الطبقة matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release إلى درجة حرارة تبلغ حوالي 60°م على الأقل، أو حوالي 62°م على الأقل، ولكن أقل من 90°م على الأقل، أو اقل من 80 °م على الأقل.
- 1212- العملية وفقاً لأي عنصر حماية من (1) إلى (11)، حيث تحدث خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في فرن oven له درجة حرارة داخلية.
- 1313- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية رقم (12)، حيث أن درجة حرارة الخطوة temperature step (ج) هي درجة الحرارة الداخلية inside temperature المستهدفة للفرن oven، حيث تبدأ خطوة المعالجة curing step عندما تبلغ درجة الحرارة الداخلية للفرن inside temperature oven درجة الحرارة المذكورة، وتنتهي خطوة المعالجة إما عندما يتم إيقاف التسخين أو على الأقل تخفيضه ومن ثم تنخفض درجة الحرارة الداخلية للفرن أدنى درجة الحرارة المذكورة بأكثر من حوالي 10°م أو أدنى من حوالي 62°م، في منحنى درجة حرارة شبه مستو plateau-like وإما عندما تنخفض درجة الحرارة الداخلية للفرن أدنى درجة الحرارة المذكورة في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile على صورة قطع مكافئ parabolic أو مثلث triangular.
- 1414- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (13)، حيث يبدي منحنى درجة الحرارة أثناء خطوة المعالجة curing step صورةً شبه مستويةٍ plateau-like form حيث يفضل لدرجة الحرارة أن تكون حوالي 68° على الأقل، ويفضل لزمن المعالجة curing time أن يكون في نطاق يتراوح من حوالي 30 دقيقة إلى حوالي 20 ساعة.
- 1515- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (11)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) باستخدام وسيلة معالجة بالحمل الحراري convection curing device تشتمل على درجة حرارة مدخل inlet air temperature، و/أو درجة حرارة هواء عادم exhaust air temperature، و/أو مجس درجة حرارة temperature probe.
- 1616- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية رقم (15)، حيث يتم تعريف درجة حرارة الخطوة temperature of step (ج) على أنها درجة الحرارة المستهدفة لهواء المدخل inlet air temperature حيث تبدأ خطوة المعالجة curing step عندما تصل درجة حرارة هواء المدخل إلى درجة الحرارة المذكورة، وتنتهي خطوة المعالجة curing step إما عندما يتم إيقاف التسخين أو على الأقل تخفيضه ومن ثم تنخفض درجة حرارة هواء المدخل أدنى درجة الحرارة المذكورة بأكثر من حوالي 10°م أو أدنى حوالي 62°م في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile شبه مستوٍ plateau-like وإما عندما تنخفض درجة حرارة هواء المدخل إلى أدنى درجة الحرارة المذكورة في منحنى درجة حرارة على صورة قطع مكافئ parabolic أو مثلث triangular.
- 1717- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (16)، حيث يبدي منحنى درجة الحرارة temperature profile خلال خطوة المعالجة curing step صورةً شبه مستويةٍ plateau-like form، وحيث يفضل لدرجة الحرارة المذكورة أن تبلغ حوالي 72°م على الأقل، ويفضل لزمن المعالجة أن يكون في نطاق يتراوح من حوالي 15 دقيقة إلى حوالي ساعتين.
- 1818- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (15)، حيث تكون درجة حرارة الخطوة temperature step (ج) هي درجة حرارة هواء عادم exhaust air temperature مستهدفة وحيث تبدأ خطوة المعالجة curing step عندما تصل درجة حرارة الهواء العادم إلى درجة الحرارة المذكورة، وتنتهي خطوة المعالجة إما عندما يتم إيقاف التسخين أو على الأقل تخفيضه ومن ثم تنخفض درجة حرارة الهواء العادم أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة بأكثر من حوالي 10°م أو أدنى حوالي 62°م في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile شبه مستوٍ plateau-like وإما عندما تنخفض درجة حرارة الهواء العادم إلى أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة في منحنى درجة حرارة على صورة قطع مكافئ parabolic أو مثلث triangular.
- 1919- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (18)، حيث يبدي منحنى درجة الحرارة temperature profile أثناء خطوة المعالجة curing step صورةً شبه مستويةٍ plateau-like form حيث يفضل لدرجة الحرارة أن تكون حوالي 68° على الأقل، ويفضل لزمن المعالجة curing time أن يكون في نطاق يتراوح من حوالي دقيقة إلى حوالي ساعتبن.
- 2020- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (15)، حيث تكون درجة حرارة الخطوة temperature step (ج) هي درجة حرارة صيغ طبقة matrix formulations ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release مستهدفة وحيث تبدأ خطوة المعالجة curing step عندما تصل درجة حرارة صيغ الطبقة ذات الإطلاق الممتد إلى درجة الحرارة المذكورة، وتنتهي خطوة المعالجة إما عندما يتم إيقاف التسخين أو على الأقل تخفيضه ومن ثم تنخفض درجة حرارة صيغ الطبقة ذات الإطلاق الممتد أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة بأكثر من حوالي 10°م أو أدنى حوالي 62°م في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile شبه مستوٍ plateau-like وإما عندما تنخفض درجة حرارة صيغ الطبقة ذات الإطلاق الممتد إلى أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة في منحنى درجة حرارة على صورة قطع مكافئ parabolic أو مثلث triangular.
- 2121- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (15)، حيث تكون درجة حرارة الخطوة (ج) هي درجة حرارة مستهدفة يتم قياسها بواسطة مجس درجة حرارة temperature probe وحيث تبدأ خطوة المعالجة عندما تصل درجة الحرارة التي يتم قياسها بواسطة مجس إلى درجة الحرارة المذكورة، وتنتهي خطوة المعالجة إما عندما يتم إيقاف التسخين أو على الأقل تخفيضه ومن ثم تنخفض درجة الحرارة يتم قياسها بواسطة مجس أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة بأكثر من حوالي 10°م أو أدنى حوالي 62°م في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile شبه مستوٍ plateau-like وإما عندما تنخفض درجة الحرارة يتم قياسها بواسطة مجس probe إلى أدنى من درجة الحرارة المذكورة في منحنى درجة حرارة temperature profile على صورة قطع مكافئ parabolic أو مثلث triangular.
- 2222- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (21)، حيث يبدي منحنى درجة الحرارة temperature profile أثناء خطوة المعالجة curing step صورةً شبه مستويةٍ plateau-like form حيث يفضل لدرجة الحرارة أن تكون حوالي 68°م على الأقل، ويفضل لزمن المعالجة curing time أن يكون في نطاق يتراوح من حوالي 15 دقيقة إلى حوالي ساعتبن.
- 2323- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (11)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في طبقة من صيغ طبقة matrix formulations التدفق الحر free flowing ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release.
- 2424- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (23)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في وعاء تغليف coating pan.
- 2525- العملية وفقاً عناصر الحماية (1-24)، حيث تشتمل على خطوة إضافية لتغلف صيغ طبقة matrix formulation التدفق الحر free flowing ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release.
- 2626- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (25)، وتشتمل أيضاً على الخطوات التالية:(أ) دمج على الأقل (1) polyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight ، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، يبلغ 1000000 على الأقل, و (2) عامل فعال active agent واحد على الأقل، لتكوين تركيبة؛ (ب) تشكيل التركيبة المذكورة لتكوين صيغة طبقة ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release في صورة قرص form tablet بالضغط المباشر direct compression؛ و (ج) معالجة القرص curing tablet المذكور عن طريق - تعريض طبقة من أقراص تدفق حر free flowing إلى درجة حرارة يتراوح نطاقها من 62°م إلى حوالي 90°م لفترة زمنية تبلغ حوالي دقيقة واحدة على الأقل في وعاء تغليف coating pan، و - التبريد اللاحق subsequently cooling لطبقة أقراص bed tablets التدفق الحر free flowing إلى درجة حرارة أقل من حوالي 50°م؛ وبعد ذلك (د) تغليف صورة الجرعة coating dosage form في وعاء التغليف coating pan المذكور.
- 2727- عملية لتحضير صورة جرعة صيدلانية فمية صلبة solid oral ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release، حيث تشتمل على الخطوات التالية على الأقل:(أ) دمج على الأقل: (1) polyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، يبلغ 1000000 على الأقل, و (2) عامل فعال active agent واحد على الأقل، لتكوين تركيبة؛ (ب) تشكيل التركيبة لتكوين صيغة طبقة matrix formulation ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release؛ و (ج) معالجة صيغة الطبقة ذات الإطلاق الممتد المذكورة، حيث تشتمل على الأقل على خطوة معالجة حيث أن polyethylene oxide المذكور ينصهر جزئياً partially melts على الأقل.
- 2828-formulation ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release في صورة قرص form tablet.
- 2929- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (28)، حيث يتم في الخطوة (ب) تشكيل التركيبة بواسطة الكبس المباشر direct compression للتركيبة المذكورة.
- 3030- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (29)، حيث ينصهر حوالي 20 ٪ على الأقل، أو حوالي 40٪ على الأقل، أو حوالي 75٪ على الأقل من polyethylene oxide مرتفع الوزن الجزيئي high molecular weight.
- 3131- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (30)، حيث ينصهر حوالي 100٪ من polyethylene oxide مرتفع الوزن الجزيئي high molecular weight.
- 3232- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (27-31)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في فرن oven.
- 3333- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية (27-31)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في وسيلة معالجة بالحمل الحراري convection curing device.
- 3434- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية (27-31)، حيث تتم خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) في طبقة من صيغ طبقة matrix formulations التدفق الحر free flowing ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release.
- 3535- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (34)، حيث تم المعالجة curing في وعاء تغليف coating pan.
- 3636- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (27-35)، تشتمل على خطوة إضافية لتغليف صيغة الطبقة coating matrix formulation المعالَج ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release.
- 3737- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (36)، حيث أن العامل الفعال active agent هو مسكن شبه الأفيوني opioid analgesic.
- 3838-العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (37)، حيث يتم اختيار المسكن شبه الأفيوني opioid analgesic من مجموعة :alfentanil, allylprodine, alphaprodine, anileridine, benzylmorphine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, dezocine, diampromide, diamorphone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiambutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, eptazocine, ethoheptazine, ethylmethylthiambutene, ethylmorphine, etonitazene, etorphine, dihydroetorphine, fentanyl and derivatives, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, hydroxypethidine, isomethadone, ketobemidone, levorphanol, levophenacylmorphan, lofentanil, meperidine, meptazinol, metazocine, methadone, metopon, morphine, myrophine, narceine, nicomorphine, norlevorphanol, normethadone, nalorphine, nalbuphene, normorphine, norpipanone, opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, papaveretum, pentazocine, phenadoxone, phenomorphan, phenazocine, phenoperidine, piminodine, piritramide, propheptazine, promedol, properidine, propoxyphene, sufentanil, tilidine, tramadol. وأملاح مقبولة صيدلانيا وhydrates ومذيبات solvates منها، وخلائط من أي مما سبق
- 3939- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (37)، حيث يتم اختيار المسكن شبه الأفيوني opioid analgesic من مجموعة :codeine, morphine, oxycodone, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, or oxymorphone. أو أملاح مقبولة صيدلانيا وhydrates وذوبات solvates منها، وخلائط من أي مما سبق.
- 4040- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية رقم (39)، حيث يكون المسكن شبه الأفيوني opioid analgesic عبارة عن oxycodone hydrochloride، وتشتمل الجرعة على من حولي 5 مجم إلى حوالي 500 مجم من oxycodone hydrochloride.
- 4141- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (40)، حيث تشتمل الجرعة على 5 مجم، أو 7.5 مجم، أو 10 مجم، أو 15 مجم، أو 20 مجم، أو 30 مجم، أو 40 مجم، أو 45 مجم، أو 60 مجم، أو 80 مجم، أو 90 مجم، أو 120 مجم، أو 160 مجم من oxycodone hydrochloride.
- 4242- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (39-41)، حيث يكون العامل الفعال active agent عبارة عن oxycodone hydrochloride به مستوى من 14-hydroxycodeinone يقل عن حوالي 25 جزء في المليون، ويفضل أقل من حوالي 15 جزء في المليون، أو أقل من حوالي 10 جزء في المليون، أو أقل من حوالي 5 جزء في المليون.
- 4343- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية رقم (37)، حيث يكون المسكن الأفيوني عبارة عن oxymorphone hydrochloride وتشتمل صورة الجرعة على من حوالي 1 مجم إلى حوالي 500 مجم من oxymorphone hydrochloride.
- 4444- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (43)، حيث تشتمل الجرعة على 5 مجم، أو 7.5 مجم، أو 10 مجم، أو 15 مجم، أو 20 مجم، أو 30 مجم، أو 40 مجم، أو 45 مجم، أو 60 مجم، أو 80 مجم، أو 90 مجم، أو 120 مجم، أو 160 مجم من oxymorphone hydrochloride.
- 4545- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (37)، حيث يكون المسكن الأفيوني opioid analgesic عبارة عن hydromorphone hydrochloride، وتشتمل صورة الجرعة dosage form على من حوالي 1 مجم إلى حوالي 100 مجم من hydromorphone hydrochloride.
- 4646-- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (45)، حيث تشتمل الجرعة على 2 مجم، أو 4 جم، أو 8 جم، أو 12 جم، أو 16 جم، أو 24 جم، أو 32 جم، أو 48 جم، أو 64 جم من hydromorphone hydrochloride.
- 4747- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (46)، حيث أن polyethylene oxide الواحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، يتراوح من 2.000.000 إلى 8.000.000.
- 4848- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (47)، حيث أن polyethylene oxide له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight قدره 2.000.000 أو 4.000.000 7.000.000 أو 8.000.000.
- 4949-- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (48)، حيث تشتمل التركيبة أيضا على polyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، يقل عن 1.000.000.
- 5050- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (50)، حيث يتراوح الوزن الجزيئي لـ polyethylene oxide من 100.000 إلى 900.000.
- 5151- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (50)، حيث يكون الوزن الجزيئي لـ polyethylene oxide 100.000.
- 5252- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (51)، حيث يبلغ المحتوي الإجمالي لـ polyethylene oxide في التركيبة حوالي 80 ٪ (بالوزن) على الأقل.
- 5353- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (52)، حيث يكون العامل الفعال active agent هو oxycodone hydrochloride، ويبلغ المحتوي الإجمالي لـ oxycodone hydrochloride في التركيبة حوالي 5 ٪ (بالوزن) على الأقل.
- 5454- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (53)، حيث يكون المحتوى في التركيبة من polyethylene oxide الواحد على الأقل الذي له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight يبلغ 1.000.000 استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements هو حوالي 80 ٪ (بالوزن) على الأقل.
- 5555- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (54)، حيث تشتمل التركيبة على polyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية rheological measurements، يبلغ 1.000.000 وpolyethylene oxide واحد على الأقل له وزن جزيئي تقريبي، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية، يقل عن 1.000.000، حيث تشتمل التركيبة على حوالي 10٪ (بالوزن) على الأقل أو 20٪ (بالوزن) على الأقل من polyethylene oxide له وزن جزيئي تقريبي approximate molecular weight، استناداً إلى قياسات انسيابية، يقل عن 1.000.000.
- 5656- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (55)، حيث يتم تعريض صورة الجرعة dosage form إلى درجة حرارة أقل من حوالي 80°م أو أقل من حوالي 77°م.
- 5757- العملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (56)، حيث تؤدي خطوة المعالجة curing step (ج) إلى نقص في كثافة صيغة الطبقة density matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتد extended release.
- 5858- العملية وفقاً لعنصر الحماية (57)، حيث تقل كثافة صيغة الطبقة المعالجة density cured matrix formulation ذات الإطلاق الممتدextended release مقارنةً بكثافة صيغة الطبقة غير المعالجة uncured ذات الإطلاق الممتد بمقدار يبلغ حوالي 0.5٪ على الأقل، ويفضل، حوالي 0.7٪ على الأقل.
- 5959- صورة جرعة صيدلانية فمية صلبة solid oral ذات إطلاق ممتد extended release يمكن الحصول عليها عن طريق عملية وفقاً لأي من عناصر الحماية من (1) إلى (58).
Independent claims59
12,061 paragraphs in 112 sections, as filed
Tamper-resistant oral pharmaceutical dosage forms comprising an opioid analgesic
Tamper Resistant Oral Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms Comprising an Opioid Analgesic
Full description
Background of the invention:
The present invention relates to pharmaceutical dosage forms, e.g., a tamper-resistant dosage form comprising an opioid analgesic, processes of manufacture, uses, and methods for using them in therapy.
Pharmaceutical products are sometimes subject to misuse. For example, a given dose of an opioid agonist may be more effective when given parenterally than the same dose when given orally. Some formulations may be manipulated to provide an opioid agonist contained in these formulations for illicit use. Metered-release formulations containing an opioid agent are sometimes crushed or subjected to extraction with solvents (such as ethanol) by drug users to provide the opioid within these formulations for rapid release for oral administration. Orally or parenteral injection.
Metered-release opioid agonist dosage forms that have the ability to release a portion of the opioid when exposed to ethanol can also result in a patient receiving the dose sooner than intended if they ignore the directions for use and use alcohol simultaneously with the dosage form. dosage form.
Hence, the field still needs oral dosage forms that include an opioid cofactor without significantly altering opioid release properties upon contact with alcohol and/or with resistance to crushing.
General description of the invention:
Certain embodiments of the present invention are intended to provide an extended release oral dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic and being tamper resistant.
An objective of specific embodiments of the present invention is to provide an extended-release oral dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic and characterized by crush resistance.
An objective of specific embodiments according to the present invention is to provide an extended-release oral dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic and characterized by resistance to alcohol extraction and elimination of the dose when used concomitantly with or in contact with alcohol.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or individual multiparticles can Become at least flat without breaking, and are characterized by the disc or individual particulates having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or individual particulates. Prior to flattening, such that the flattened tablet or individual particulates provide a dissolution rate in vitro, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid ( SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h of dissolution that deviates by no more than about 20% points from the corresponding in vitro dissolution rate of a non-flat reference tablet non-flattened or reference multi particulates.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or individual multi particulates can Become at least flattened without breaking, and are characterized by the individual disc or particulate having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or particulate. Individual multiple before flattening, whereby a flattened or non-flattened tablet or individual flattened or flattened microparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm at 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h of dissolution that deviates by no more than about 20% points from the rate Corresponding in vitro dissolution, measured using USP type 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid without enzymes at 37°C without ethanol, for a flattened or non-flattened reference tablet or reference particulates reference multiple particulates flat and non-flat, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; and at least one active agent; And
The composition contains at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In accordance with the specific embodiments, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by weight) of oxycodone hydrochloride.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes a composition consisting of at least one active agent;
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
At least one polyethylene oxide has an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000,000.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process for preparing an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form,
It includes the following steps:
Merge at least
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) Formation of the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; And
(c) Curing said extended-release template formulation, comprising at least a processing step of exposing said extended-release template formulation to a temperature at least the ductility temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a period of at least about one minute.
In specific embodiments, the present invention is directed to the preparation of an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form, comprising at least the following steps:
(a) Combine at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) forming the composition to form an extended-release template formulation; And
(c) Curing matrix formulation of said extended release, comprising at least a curing step such that said polyethylene oxide is at least partially melted.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release block formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, wherein the tablet or multiparticles The individual multi particulate can become at least flattened without breaking, and is characterized by the fact that the tablet or individual multiparticle has a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 60%. of the thickness of the tablet or individual flattened PM prior to flattening, wherein said flat disk or flattened individual PM provides the in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 mL of liquid Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, characterized by the percentage amount active released at 0.5 h of dissolution that deviates by no more than about 20% points from the corresponding dissolution rate dissolution rate in the laboratory for a non-flat reference tablet or non-flat reference particulates, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release block formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or multiparticles The individual can at least become flat without breaking, and is characterized by the individual disk or particle having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or particle. Individualization prior to flattening, whereby said flattened tablet or flattened multi particulates and non-flattened reference tablet or flattened multi particulates provide the dissolution rate in the laboratory, when measured with a USP type device 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, between about 5 and about 40% (by weight) of the agent Effectively released after 0.5 hours.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein A tablet or individual microparticle can at least become flattened without breaking, and is characterized by a tablet or individual microparticle having a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 60% of the thickness. Thickness of the individual tablet or microparticle before flattening, such that the flattened or flattened tablet or the flattened or flattened polyparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm at 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount of active agent released at 0.5 h of dissolution that deviates by no more than about a 20% point from the dissolution rate In vitro counterpart, measured using USP type 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C, for a flat and non-flat reference tablet. flattened or reference multi particulates and non-flat, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or Individual PMs can become at least flattened without breaking, and the tablet or individual PM has a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of Thickness of an individual tablet or particle before flattening. A flattened or flattened tablet or flattened or flattened multiple particle provides the in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm In 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes containing 40% or 20% ethanol at 37°C, between about 5 and about 40% (by weight) of the active agent is released after 0.5 hours.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) at least one active agent selected from opioid analgesics; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 85% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation comprises:
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) 15 or 20 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) 40 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 65% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) 60 mg or 80 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 60% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And the:
(2) 8 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 94% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) 12 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 92% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And the:
(2) 32 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 90% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one active agent selected from an opioid analgesics;
(2) at least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(3) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000,000.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) at least one active agent selected from an opioid analgesics; And
Whereas, the composition includes at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) at least one active agent; And
When the extended-release die formulation is subjected to an indentation test, it has a cracking force of 110 Newtons.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes a composition consisting of at least:
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
(2) at least one active agent; And
When the extended-release die formulation is subjected to an indentation test, it has an “incision depth distance” of 1.0 mm.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a treatment method whereby a dosage form according to the invention comprising an opioid analgesic is administered to treat pain in a patient in need.
In certain embodiments, the present invention directs the use of a dosage form according to the present invention comprising an opioid analgesic to manufacture a drug for the treatment of pain.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to the use of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, having an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000 based on urological measurements, in the form of a matrix comprising an active agent selected from opioids To give the extended release solid oral dosage form resistant to alcohol extraction.
In certain embodiments, the invention is directed to a process for preparing an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form, comprising at least the following steps:
(a) Merge at least
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) Formation of the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; And
(c) Processing said extended-release template formulation, comprising at least a processing step of exposing the extended-release template formulation to a temperature that is at least the polyethylene oxide softening temperature for a period of at least 5 minutes.
According to certain embodiments of the invention, the dosage form of the sustained-release solid pharmaceutical is suitable for use as a suppository.
The term “extended release” is defined for the purposes of the present invention to refer to products that are formulated to deliver the drug over an extended period after ingestion, allowing for a reduction in dose times compared to a drug delivered in a conventional dosage form (e.g. as a solution or solution). Image of immediate release dose.
The term “immediate release” is defined for the purposes of the present invention to refer to products that are formulated to allow the drug to dissolve in gastrointestinal contents without intending to delay or prolong the dissolution or absorption of the drug.
The term “solid oral extended-release dosage form” refers to a dosage form that includes a unit dose of the active agent in an extended-release form such as an “extended release matrix formulation” and optionally other adjuvants Common additives and conventional preservatives such as a protective coating, capsule, etc., and optionally any other additional properties or ingredients used in the dosage form. If not specifically stated, the term “solid oral extended-release dosage form” refers to said dosage form in its intact form, more specifically before any manipulation. The extended-release dosage form may be, for example, a tablet containing the extended-release formulation or a capsule containing the extended-release formulation in the form of multiple particulates. The term “solid oral extended-release dosage form” can include part of an active agent in an extended-release form and part of an active agent in an immediate-release form, for example as an immediate release layer of an active agent. Surrounding the dosage form or immediate-release component included in the dosage form.
The term “extended release matrix formulation” is defined for the purposes of the present invention as a solid form of a formulation comprising at least one active agent and at least one extended release property such as an extended release matrix such as high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. The composition may optionally include more than these two components; That is, it may include other active agents, additional retardants and/or other substances including, but not limited to, low molecular weight polyethylene oxides, other adjuvants and conventional additives familiar in the art.
The term “bioequivalent” for the purposes of the present invention is defined to refer to a dose profile that provides the geometric mean of the Cmax, AUCt, and AUCinf values for an active agent, with the 90% confidence intervals based on the ratio (test/reference) ranging from 80.00 % to 125.00%. It is preferable that the average values of Cmax, AUCt, and AUCinf range from 80.00% to 125.00% as determined in cases of eating and fasting.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “polyethylene oxide” is defined as having a molecular weight of at least 25,000, measured to the best of knowledge in the art, and preferably a molecular weight of at least 100,000. Lower molecular weight structures are usually referred to as polyethylene glycols.
The term "high molecular weight polyethylene oxide" is defined for the purposes of the present invention as having an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000. To serve the purpose of the present invention, the approximate molecular weight is based on rheological measurements. Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 1,000,000 when a 2% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide is demonstrated using a Brookfield RVF viscometer, No. 1 spindle, at 10 rpm, at temperature 25°C, viscosity range ranges from 400 to 800 MPa per second (centipoise cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 2,000,000 when a 2% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield RVF viscometer, spindle number 3, at 10 rpm, at a temperature of 25°C, shows Viscosity range is 2000 to 4000 MPa/s (centipoise). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 4,000,000 when a 1% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield model RVF viscometer, No. 2 spindle, at 2 rpm, at 25°C, shows a range Viscosity ranges from 1650 to 5500 MPa per second (centipoise cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 5,000,000 when a 1% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide is demonstrated using a Brookfield RVF viscometer, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at Temperature 25°C, viscosity range ranges from 5500 to 7500 MPa per second (centipoise). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 7,000,000 when a 1% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield RVF viscometer, No. 2 spindle, at 2 rpm, at 25°C, shows a range Viscosity ranges from 7,500 to 10,000 MPa per second (centipoise). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 8,000,000 when a 1% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield RVF viscometer, No. 2 spindle, at 2 rpm, at 25°C, shows a range Viscosity ranges from 10,000 to 15,000 MPa per second (centipoise).
Regarding polyethylene oxides with low molecular weight; Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 100,000 when a 5% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield model RVF viscometer, No. 1 spindle, at 50 rpm, at 25°C, shows a viscosity range of From 30 to 50 MPa per second (centipoise), polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 900,000 when a 5% (by weight) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide Using a Brookfield viscometer model RVF, No. 2 shaft, at 2 rpm, at 25°C, viscosity range from 8,800 to 17,600 MPa s (centipoise).
The term "low molecular weight polyethylene oxide" is defined for the purposes of the present invention as having an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000 based on the rheological measurements specified above.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “direct compression” is defined to refer to a tablet making process whereby the tablet or other compressed dosage form is manufactured following a process comprising the steps of mixing the compounds by drying, and compressing the dry mixture to form the dosage form, for example using diffusion blend and/or convection mixing process, for example:
guidance for industry, supac-ir/mr: immediate release and modified release solid oral dosage forms, manufacturing equipment addendum.
The term “bed of free-flowing tablets” is defined for the purposes of the present invention as a batch of tablets kept in motion relative to each other, for example in a packing vessel set at a suitable rotational speed or in a fluidized bed of tablets. . The free flowing tablets coating reduces or prevents the tablets from sticking together.
The term “flattening” and related terms when used in the context of making tablets or other dosage forms flat according to the present invention means that a tablet is subjected to a force applied from a direction substantially perpendicular to the diameter, and substantially in line with the thickness of the tablet. tablet for example. It is possible to apply force using a carver-type bench press (unless otherwise specified) to the point where target flatness/reduced thickness is necessary. According to specific embodiments of the invention, flattening does not break the tablet into small pieces, but edge spits and cracks can occur. Flatness is described in terms of the thickness of a flat disc compared to the thickness of a flat disc, expressed as a percentage of thickness, based on the thickness of the flat disc. In addition to tablets, flattening can be applied to any dosage form, such that the force is applied from a direction that is closely aligned with the smallest diameter (more specifically thickness) of the dosage form when the form is not spherical and from any direction when it is spherical. Flatness is then described in terms of the thickness/smallest diameter of the flat shape compared to the thickness/smallest diameter of the non-flat shape expressed as a percentage of thickness, based on the thickness/smallest diameter of the non-flat shape when the initial shape is spherical, or percentage thickness, based on the diameter Not flat when the initial shape is spherical. Thickness is measured using a thickness gauge (eg, digital thickness gauge). Figures 4 through 6 show tablets that have been flattened using a Carver bench press. The initial appearance of the tablets is shown in Figures 1 through 3 to the left of the image.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, in addition to using a bench press, a hammer may be used to flatten tablets/dose images. In such a flattening process, a hammer is used manually and the blows are delivered from a direction that is closely aligned with the thickness of the disc, for example. Flatness is then also described in terms of the thickness/smallest diameter of the flat shape compared to the non-flat shape expressed as a thickness percentage, based on the thickness/smallest diameter of the non-flat shape when the initial shape is non-spherical, or the thickness percentage , based on the non flattened diameter when the initial shape is spherical. Thickness measured is measured using a thickness gauge (for example, a digital thickness gauge).
On the other hand, when carrying out the fracture strength or hardness test according to what is mentioned in the reference:
remingtons pharmaceutical sciences, 18th edition, 1990, chapter 89 oral solid dosage forms, pages 1633-1665.
The contents of which are included by reference herein, using a Schleuniger device, the tablet/dose form is placed between a pair of flat plates arranged in parallel, and is compressed by the two flat plates so that the force is applied perpendicularly to an extent Large in thickness and largely aligned with the diameter of the tablet, thus reducing the diameter in this direction.
This reduced diameter is expressed as a percentage of the diameter, based on the diameter of the disc before the breaking strength test was performed. Tablet hardness is defined as the force at which the tablet under test/dose form breaks. Tablets/dosage forms that do not break but are deformed by the applied force are considered to be resistant to breakage at that specified force.
Another test to measure tablet strength/dosage profiles is the indentation test using a texture analyzer such as the TA-XT2 Texture Analyzer (from:
texture technologies corp., 18 fairview road, scarsdale, ny 10583). In this method, the tablets/dose images are placed on top of a stainless stand equipped with a slightly concave surface, and then accessed with a descending probe for the texture analyzer, such as a stainless steel ball probe with a diameter of 1/8 of the TA type. -8A. Before the measurement begins, the disks are stacked directly under the probe, so that the descending probe will penetrate the disks axially, meaning that it will penetrate to the center of the disk, and so that the force of the descending probe is applied largely perpendicular to the diameter, and in parallel with Significantly with the thickness of the disc. First, the structure analyzer probe begins moving toward the disk sample at the pre-test speed. When the probe contacts the surface of the disc, and then reaches the operating force set, the probe continues to move at the test speed, and penetrates into the disc. For each penetration depth of the probe, which will later be referred to as a “distance,” the corresponding force will be measured, and data will be collected. When the probe reaches the maximum penetration depth required, it changes direction, moving backwards at post-test speed, while additional data can be collected. The cracking force is defined as the first local maximum force reached in the corresponding force/distance diagram, and is calculated using for example the Texture Analyzer software, version 2.64 English. To avoid being bound by any theory, it is believed that at this point some structural damage to the tablet occurs in the form of fracture. However, the broken tablets/dosage forms according to specific embodiments of the present invention remain intact as indicated by continued resistance to the descending probe. The distance corresponding to the first local maximum is referred to herein as the “slit depth distance”.
For the purposes of specific embodiments according to the present invention, the term “breaking strength” refers to the hardness of tablets/dose forms preferably measured using a Schleuniger device, while the term “cracking force” reflects the strength of the tablets/dose forms that It is best measured in an indentation test using a texture analyzer.
There is an additional variable for extended release die formulas that can be obtained from the notch test as mentioned above, which is the work to which the extended release die formula is subjected to in the notch test as mentioned above. The value of work corresponds to the complement of the force over the distance.
For the purposes of certain embodiments of the present invention, the term “resistant crushing” is defined to refer to dosage forms that can at least be flattened using a bench press as stated above without being crushed to no more than 60% thickness, preferably no Not more than 50% fish, preferably not more than 40% fish, even preferably not more than 30% fish, and most preferably not more than 20% fish, or 10% fish, or 5% fish.
To serve the purpose of specific embodiments according to the present invention, dosage forms are considered “resistant to axial extraction,” when the corresponding dosage form provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of enteral fluid Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by % amount active released at 0.5 h, preferably at 0.5 and 0.75 h, more preferably at 0.5 and 0.75 h One, more preferable when 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours, most preferably at 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution which deviates by no more than about 20% points or preferably by no more than 15% points at each of the time points mentioned from the corresponding dissolution rate rate in vitro measured using USP type 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated intestinal fluid without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C.
The term “tamper resistant” for purposes of the present invention refers to dosage forms that provide at least crushing resistance and resistance to alcohol extraction, and preferably resistance to both crushing and alcohol extraction, as defined above. It can also include other tamper-resistant features.
To serve the purpose of the present invention, the term “active agent” is defined as a pharmaceutically active substance including, but not limited to, opioid sedatives and opioid analgesics.
For the purposes of the present invention, the term “opioid analgesic” includes single compounds and combinations of compounds selected from a group of opioids and which provide an analgesic effect such as a single opioid agonist or a combination of opioid cofactors. , one single mixed opioid adjuvant or a combination of mixed opioid adjuvant-antagonists, or one single opioid partial adjuvant or a combination of opioid partial adjuvants and combinations of adjuvants Opiates and mixed agonists Opiates and partial opioid antagonists with one or more opioid antagonists, stereoisomers, ether or ester, salts, hydrates, and solvates thereof, combinations of any of the foregoing, and the like.
The present invention disclosed herein is specifically intended to include the use of an opioid analgesic in the form of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Pharmaceutical acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, inorganic acid salts such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, sulfate, phosphate, and the like; organic acid salts such as formate, acetate, trifluoroacetate, maleate, tartrate, and the like; sulfonates such as methanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and the like, and amino acid salts such as arginate, asparginate, glutamate, and the like; And mineral salts metal salts such as sodium salt, potassium salt, cesium salt, and the like; And organic amine salts such as triethylamine salt, pyridine salt, picoline salt, ethanolamine salt, triethanolamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, N,N'-dibenzylethylenediamine salt and the like.
The opioids used according to the present invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers, and may be a source of enantiomers, diastereomers, or other stereoisomers. It is also intended that the present invention includes the use of all such possible forms as well as racemic and analyte forms and combinations thereof. When compounds described here contain olefinic double bonds or other centers with geometric asymmetry, they are intended to contain both geometric isomers E and Z. All tautomers are intended to be included in the present invention as well.
As used herein, the term “stereoisomers” is a general term for all isomers of individual molecules that differ only in the orientation of their atoms in space. The term includes enantiomers and isomers of compounds that contain more than one chiral center and are characterized as mirror images of each other (diastereomers).
The term "chiral center" refers to a carbon atom to which four different groups are bonded.
The term "enantiomer" or "enantiomeric enantiomer" refers to a molecule that is not superimposed on its mirror image, and is therefore optically active, as the enantiomer rotates around the plane of polarized light in one direction, and its mirror image rotates around the plane of light. The polarizer is in the opposite direction.
The term "racemic" refers to a mixture of equal parts of optically inactive enantiomers.
The term "resolution" refers to the separation, concentration, or depletion of one of the two isoforms of a molecule.
The opioid cofactors useful in the present invention include, but are not limited to:
Alfentanil, allylprodine, alphaprodine, anileridine, benzylmorphine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, dezocine, diampromide, diamorphone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiambutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, and dipipanone, heptazocine, ethoheptazine, ethylmethylthiambutene, ethylmorphine, etonitazine, etorphine, dihydroetorphine, fentanyl and its derivatives, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, hydroxypethidine, isomethadone, ketobemidone, levorphanol, levophenacylmorphan, lofentanil, meperidine, meptazinol, metazocine, methadone, metopon, morphine, myrophine, narceine, nicomorphine, norlevorphanol, normethadone, nalorphine, nalbuphene, normorphine, norpipanone, opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, papaveretum, pentazocine, and phenadoxone , phenomorphan, phenazocine, phenoperidine, piminodine, piritramide, propheptazine, promedol, and properidine, propoxyphene, sufentanil, tilidine, tramadol, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvents thereof, mixtures of any of the above, and the like.
Opioid antagonists useful in combination with opioid agonists as described above are, for example, naloxone, naltrexone, nalorphine or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, mixtures of any of the above, and the like.
In certain embodiments, for example, a combination of oxycodone hydrochloride and naloxone hydrochloride in an amount of up to 2:1.
In certain embodiments, the opioid analgesic is selected from codeine, morphine, oxycodone, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, oxymorphone, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, mixtures of any of the foregoing, and the like.
In certain embodiments, the opioid analgesic is oxycodone, hydromorphone, oxymorphone, or a salt thereof such as, for example, hydrochloride. The dosage form includes a ratio ranging from about 5 mg to about 500 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride, or from about 1 mg to about 100 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride, or from about 5 mg to about 500 mg of oxymorphone hydrochloride. If other salts, derivatives, or forms are used, equimolar amounts of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative, or form may be used including, without limitation, hydrates, solvates, or free base. The dosage form includes, for example, 5 mg, 7.5 g, 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 30 g, 40 g, 45 g, 60 g, 80 g, or 90 g, 120 mg, or 160 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative, or other form including, without limitation, hydrates, solvates, or free bases. The dosage form includes, for example, 5 mg, 7.5 g, 10 g, 15 g, 20 g, 30 g, 40 g, 45 g, 60 g, 80 g, or 90 g , or 120 mg, or 160 mg of oxymorphone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative, or other form including, without limitation, hydrates, solvates, or free bases. The dosage form includes, for example, 2 mg, 4 g, 8 g, 12 g, 16 g, 24 g, 32 g, 48 g, or 64 g of hydromorphone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts equimolar amounts of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative, or other form including, without limitation, hydrates, solubilities or free bases.
International Patent No. 097801/2005 1a, and US Patent Nos. 7,129,248 2b and 0173029/2006 1a, all three of which are incorporated herein by reference, describe a process for preparing oxycodone hydrochloride having a level of 14-hydroxycodeinone of less than about 25 ppm, preferably Less than about 15 ppm, or less than about 10 ppm, or less than about 5 ppm, preferably less than about 2 ppm, or less than about 1 ppm, or less than about 0.5 ppm per million, or less than about 0.25 ppm.
The abbreviation ppm used in this application means "parts per million". For 14-hydroxycodeinone, the term “ppm” means parts per million of 14-hydroxycodeinone in the product of a given sample. It is possible to determine the level of 14-hydroxycodeinone using any method known in the field, preferably using HPLC analysis using UV detection.
In certain embodiments according to the present invention, where the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, oxycodone hydrochloride is used having a level of 14-hydroxycodeinone less than about 25 ppm, preferably less than about 15 ppm, or less than about 10 ppm. per million, or less than about 5 ppm, preferably less than about 2 ppm, or less than about 1 ppm, or less than about 0.5 ppm, or less than about 0.25 ppm.
In certain other embodiments, other therapeutically active agents may be used in accordance with the present invention, either in combination with opioids or in place of opioids. Examples of such therapeutically effective agents include antihistamines (eg, dimenhydrinate, diphenhydramine, chlorpheniramine, and dexchlorpheniramine maleate), and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (eg, naproxen, diclofenac, indomethacin, ibuprofen, sulindac, Cox inhibitors). -2, acetaminophen), anti-emetics agents (eg, metoclopramide, methylnaltrexone), and anti-epileptics (eg, phenytoin, meprobmate, and nitrazepam), vasodilators (eg, nifedipine, papaverine, diltiazem, and nicardipine), anti-tussive agents, expectorants (eg, codeine phosphate), and anti-asthmatics (eg, theophylline), antacids, seizures, anti-spasmodics (eg, atropine, scopolamine), antidiabetics (eg, insulin), and diuretics (eg, ethacrynic acid, bendrofluthiazide), blood pressure hypotensives (eg, clonidine, methyldopa), bronchodilators (eg, albuterol), steroids (eg, hydrocortisone, triamcinolone, prednisone), and antibiotics (eg, tetracycline), antihemorrhoidals, hypnotics, psychotropics, antidiarrheals, mucolytics, and analgesics sedatives, decongestants (eg, pseudoephedrine), laxatives, vitamins, stimulants (including appetite suppressants such as phenylpropanolamine) as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof themselves.
In certain embodiments, the invention directs the use of Cox-2 inhibitors as active agents, in combination with opioid analgesics or instead of opioid analgesics, for example using Cox-2 inhibitors such as:
meloxicam (4-hydroxy-2-methyl-N-(5-methyl-2-thiazolyl)-2H-1,2-benzothiazine-3-carboxamide-1,1-dioxide).
As disclosed in US Patents 056.347/10 and 825.938/11, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, and:
nabumetone (4-(6-methoxy-2-naphthyl)-2-butanone), as disclosed in US Patent No. 056.348/10, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference:
celecoxib (4-[5-(4-methylphenyl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]enzenesulfonamide)
As disclosed in US Patent No. 698,394/11, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, nimesulide (N-(4-Nitro-2-phenoxyphenyl)methanesulfonamide), as disclosed in US Patent No. 057630/10 , the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference, and:
N-[3-(formylamino)-4-oxo-6-phenoxy-4H-1-benzopyran-7-yl]methanesulfonamide as disclosed in US Patent No. 057.632/10, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
The present invention is also directed to dosage forms using active agents such as benzodiazepines, barbiturates, or amphetamines. It can also be combined with corresponding antimaterials.
The term "benzodiazepines" refers to benzodiazepines and drugs derived from benzodiazepines that have the ability to depress the central nervous system. Benzodiazepines include, but are not limited to, alprazolam, bromazepam, chlordiazepoxide, clorazepate, diazepam, estazolam, flurazepam, halazepam, ketazolam, lorazepam, nitrazepam, oxazepam, prazepam, quazepam, temazepam, triazolam, and methylphenid ate, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates Solvates and mixtures thereof. The benzodiazepines that may be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, flumazenil as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates.
Barbiturates refer to sedative-hypnotic drugs derived from barbituric acid (2, 4, 6,-trioxohexahydropyrimidine). Barbiturates include, but are not limited to, amobarbital, aprobarbotal, phenobarbital, and secobarbital, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, and mixtures thereof. The benzodiazepines that may be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, amphetamines as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solutes.
Stimulants refer to medications that stimulate the central nervous system. Stimulants include, but are not limited to, amphetamines, such as amphetamine, dextroamphetamine resin complex, and:
dextroamphetamine, methamphetamine, and methylphenidate, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates and mixtures thereof. The stimulants that may be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, benzodiazepines as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solutes as described herein.
Brief explanation of the drawings:
Figure 1 is a photograph of a top view of the tablets (along the thickness of the tablet) in Example 7-1 before (left side) and after (right side) a breaking strength test using a Schleuniger Model 6D.
Figure 2 is a top-view photograph of the tablets (along the thickness of the tablet) in Example 7-2 before (left side) and after (right side) fracture strength testing with the Schleuniger Model 6D.
Figure 3 is a top-view photograph of the tablets (along the thickness of the tablet) in Example 7-3 before (left side) and after (right side) fracture strength testing with the Schleuniger Model 6D.
Figure 4 is a photograph of a top view of the tablet (along the thickness of the tablet) in Example 7-1 after it has been flattened using a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model 3912).
Figure 5 is a photograph of a top view of the disc (along the thickness of the disc) in Example 7-2 after it has been flattened using a Carver manual bench press (Hydraulic Unit Model No. 3912).
Figure 6 is a photograph of a top view of the disc (along the thickness of the disc) in Example 7-3 after it was flattened using a Carver manual bench press (Hydraulic Unit Model No. 3912).
Figure 7 is a photograph of a top view of the disc (along the thickness of the disc) in Example 7-1 after 10 hand strikes with the hammer.
Figure 8 is a photograph of a top view of the disc (along the thickness of the disc) in Example 7-2 after 10 hand strikes with the hammer.
Figure 9 is a photograph of a top view of the disc (along the thickness of the disc) in Example 7-3 after 10 hand strikes with the hammer.
Figure No. 10 is a diagram of the temperature curve of the curing process in Example No. 13-1.
Figure No. 11 is a diagram of the temperature curve of the curing process in Example No. 13-2.
Figure 12 is a plot of the temperature curve for the curing process in Example 13-3.
Figure 13 is a plot of the temperature curve of the curing process in Example 13-4.
Figure 14 is a plot of the temperature curve for the curing process in Example 13-5.
Figure 15 is a plot of the temperature curve of the curing process in Example 14-1.
Figure 16 is a plot of the temperature curve of the curing process in Example 14-2.
Figure 17 is a plot of the temperature curve for the curing process in Example 14-3.
Figure 18 is a plot of the temperature curve for the curing process in Example 14-4.
Figure 19 is a plot of the temperature curve for the curing process in Example 14-5.
Figure 20 is a diagram of the indentation test of Example 20 performed using Example 13-1 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, not coated).
Figure 21 is a diagram of the striation test of Example 20 performed with Example 13-2 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, not coated).
Figure 22 is a diagram of the striation test of Example 20 performed with Example 13-3 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, not coated).
Figure 23 is a diagram of the indentation test of Example 20 performed using the tablet of Example 13-4 (cured for 30 minutes, not coated).
Figure 24 is a diagram of the striation test of Example 20 performed with Example 13-5 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, not coated).
Figure 25 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 17-1 tablet (cured for 30 minutes at 37°C, not coated).
Figure 26 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 18-2 tablet (cured for 30 minutes at 37°C, not coated).
Figure 27 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 14-1 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
Figure 28 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 14-2 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
Figure 29 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 14-3 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
Figure 30 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 14-4 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
Figure 31 is a diagram of the notch test of Example 20 performed with Example 14-5 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
Figure 32 is a diagram of the indentation test of Example 20 performed using Example 16-1 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated).
Figure 33 is a diagram of the striation test of Example 20 performed with Example 16-2 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated).
Figure 34 is a diagram of the striation tests of Example 21 performed with the Example 16-1 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated) and with a 60 g commercial OxycontinTM tablet.
Figure 35 is a diagram of the striation tests of Example 21 performed with the Example 16-2 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated) and with a commercial 80 g OxycontinTM tablet.
Figure 36 shows the average plasma oxycodone concentration versus time on a linear scale [Group: full analysis: (in case of eating food)] according to Example 26.
Figure No. 37 shows the average concentration versus time image on a linear scale [Group: Complete Analysis: (in case of eating food)] according to Example No. 26.
Figure No. 38 shows the average concentration versus time image on a linear scale [Group: Complete analysis: (in fasted state)] according to Example No. 26.
Figure 39 shows the average plasma oxycodone concentration versus time on a log-linear scale [Group: full analysis: (in fasted state)] according to Example 26.
Figure 40 shows representative images of the OxyContinTM 10 mg powder tablet and the Example 7-2 powder tablet, according to Example 27.
Figure 41 shows representative images of Example 7-2 and OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets crushed before and 45 minutes after dissolution, in accordance with Example 27.
Figure 42 shows dissolution profiles for crushed 7-2M tablets and crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets, according to Example 27.
Figure 43 shows particle size distribution graphs for milled tablets (OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets, Examples 7-2 and Example 14-5), according to Example 27.
Detailed description:
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process for preparing an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form,
It includes the following steps:
(a) Merge at least
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) Formation of the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; And
(c) Curing said extended-release template formulation, comprising at least a processing step of exposing said extended-release template formulation to a temperature at least the ductility temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a period of at least about one minute.
The curing step is preferably carried out under atmospheric pressure.
In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to a process for preparing an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form,
It includes the following steps:
(a) Merge at least
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide has a molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) Formation of the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; And
(c) Curing said extended-release template formulation, comprising at least a curing step of exposing said extended-release template formulation to a temperature at least the ductility temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a period of at least 5 minutes. The curing step is preferably carried out under atmospheric pressure.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process for preparing an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form,
It includes the following steps:
(a) Merge at least
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide has a molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) forming the composition to form an extended-release template formulation; And
(c) Processing said extended release template formulation, comprising at least a curing step such that said polyethylene oxide is at least partially melted.
The curing step is preferably carried out under atmospheric pressure.
In certain models, the formulation in step (b) is formed to form an extended release matrix formulation in a tablet form. To form the extended-release block formulation into a tablet form, a direct compression process may be used. Direct compression is an effective and simple process for tablet formation by avoiding steps such as wet granulation. However, any other process known in the art can be used to manufacture tablets, such as wet granulation and subsequent compression of the granules to form tablets.
In one embodiment, the curing matrix formulation of the extended-release template in step (c) includes at least a curing step such that the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended-release template formulation at least partially melts. For example, at least about 20% or at least 30% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended-release template formulation melts. Preferably at least about 40% or at least 50%, preferably at least about 60% or at least about 75%, or at least about 90% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended-release template formulation. In a preferred embodiment, approximately 100% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide is melted.
In other embodiments, the process of curing the extended-release template formulation in step (c) includes at least a curing step where the extended-release template formulation is exposed to an elevated temperature for a specified period of time. In such embodiments, the temperature used in step (c), i.e. the curing temperature, is at least as high as the ductility temperature of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. Without being restricted by any theory, it is believed that curing at a temperature that is at least as high as the ductility temperature of high-molecular-weight polyethylene will cause the polyethylene oxide particles to at least stick together or coalesce. According to some embodiments, the curing temperature is at least about 60°C, at least about 62°C, or in a range from about 62°C to about 90°C, from about 62°C to about 85°C, from about 62°C to about 80°C, or from about 65°C to about 90°C. Or from about 65 AD to about 85 AD, or from about 65 AD to about 80 AD. It is preferable for the curing temperature to be in a range ranging from about 68°C to about 90°C, or from about 68°C to about 85°C, or from about 68°C to about 80°C, and more preferably from about 70°C to about 90°C, or from about 70°C to about 90°C, or from about 70 AD to about 85 AD or from about 70 AD to about 80 AD, and most preferably from about 72 AD to about 90 AD or from about 72 AD to about 85 AD or from about 72 AD to about 80 AD. The curing temperature can be at least about 60°C or at least about 62°C, but not less than about 90°C or less than about 80°C. It is preferable that it be in a range ranging from about 62 m to about 72 m, and especially from about 86 m to about 72 m. Preferably, the curing temperature should be at least as high as the lower end of the ductility temperature range for high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, or at least approximately 62°C or at least approximately 68°C. It is more preferable for the curing temperature to fall within the ductility temperature range of at least high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, or at least about 70°C. It is also more preferable for the curing temperature to be at least as high as the upper limit of the temperature range for high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility, or at least about 72°C. In an alternative embodiment, the curing temperature is above the upper limit of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility temperature range, for example the curing temperature is at least about 75°C or at least about 80°C.
In those embodiments, where the extended release curing matrix formulation in step (c) comprises at least a curing step wherein the extended release curing matrix formulation is exposed to an elevated temperature for a specified period of time, which period will be referred to as later in this application as “curing time”. To measure the processing time, a starting point and an end point for the processing step are determined. For the purposes of the present invention, the starting point of the curing step is defined as the point time at which the curing temperature is reached.
In certain embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form between the start point and the end point of curing. In such embodiments, the end point of the curing step is determined by the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, for example by terminating or reducing heating and/or by starting a subsequent cooling step, and the temperature is accordingly reduced below the curing temperature by more than about 10°C. and/or below the lower limit of the ductility temperature range for high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62°C. When the curing temperature is reached, and the curing step is started accordingly, deviations from the curing temperature can occur during the curing step. Such deviations can be tolerated as long as they do not exceed a value of about 10 m, preferably about 6 m, and more preferably about 3 m. For example, if a processing temperature of about 75°C is to be maintained, the measured temperature can be temporarily increased to a value of about 85°C, preferably around 81°C, more preferably around 78°C, and the measured temperature can also be temporarily decreased to a value of about 65°C , preferably around 69m, and more preferably around 72m. In cases of a larger increase in temperature and/or if the temperature drops below the lower limit of the ductility temperature range for high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62°C, the curing step is stopped, i.e. more specifically an end point is reached. It is possible to restart processing by reaching the processing temperature again.
In other embodiments, the temperature profile during the treatment step shows a parabolic or triangular form between the start and end points of the treatment. This means that after the starting point, more specifically the point time at which the curing temperature is reached, the temperature increases further to reach a maximum, and then decreases. In such embodiments, the end point of the curing step is defined as the point in time at which the temperature drops below the curing temperature.
In this context, it should be noted that depending on the device used for curing, which we will refer to later in this application as the curing device, different types of temperatures can be measured in the curing device to determine the curing temperature characteristics.
In certain embodiments, the curing step may be performed in an oven. In such models, the temperature inside the oven is measured. Based on that measurement, when a curing step is performed in a kiln, the curing temperature is defined as the target inside temperature of the kiln, and the starting point is defined as the time point at which the kiln's internal temperature reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined as (1) the point time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, after which the temperature inside the furnace drops to more than about 10°C below the curing temperature and/or below the minimum For a high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility temperature range, for example below about 62°C, in the form of a near-planar temperature, or (2) the point in time at which the temperature inside the kiln falls below the curing temperature in the curve Temperature in the form of a parabola or triangle. It is preferable that the curing step begin when the temperature inside the oven reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62°C, or at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, and preferably at least about 72°C, or at least about 75°C. In preferred embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a nearly flat profile, where the curing temperature, ie, the internal temperature of the kiln, is preferably about 68°C, for example, about 70°C, about 72°C, or about 73°C, or In a range from about 70°C to about 75°C, and it is preferable for the treatment time to be in a range ranging from about 30 minutes to about 20 hours, or more preferably from about 30 minutes to about 15 hours, or from about 30 minutes to about 4 hours, or from About 30 minutes to approx Two hours. It is most preferable for the curing time to be in the range of about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes.
In certain other embodiments, curing is performed in airflow-heated curing devices, such curing devices comprising a heated air supply (inlet) and an exhaust pipe such as a coating pan or fluidized bed. Such curing methods will later be referred to as convection curing methods. In such curing devices, it is possible to measure the inlet air temperature, i.e., the temperature of the heated air entering the convection curing device, and/or the exhaust air temperature, i.e., the temperature of the air exiting the convective curing device. It is also possible to determine or at least evaluate the temperature of the formulations inside the curing medium during the curing step, for example by using infrared temperature measuring instruments, such as an IR gun, or by measuring the temperature using a temperature probe placed inside the curing medium. device near matrix formulations with extended release. Based on this, when the curing step is performed in a convection curing medium, the curing temperature can be determined, and the curing time can be measured as follows.
In one embodiment, where the curing time is measured in accordance with Method 1, the curing temperature is defined as the target inlet air temperature, and the start point of the curing step is defined as the time point at which the target inlet air temperature reaches the curing temperature. The end point of a treatment step is defined as (1) the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, after which the inlet air temperature falls below the treatment temperature by more than about 10°C and/or below the minimum For a high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility temperature range, eg below about 62°C, as a near-planar temperature, or (2) the point in time at which the inlet air temperature falls below the process temperature in a temperature curve looks like Parabolic parabola or triangular triangle. It is preferable to begin the treatment step according to Method No. 1 when the inlet air temperature reaches a treatment temperature of at least about 62°C, or at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, and preferably at least about 72°C, or at least about 75°C. In a preferred embodiment, the temperature curve during the treatment step shows a nearly flat picture, where the treatment temperature, meaning more specifically, the target inlet air temperature, is preferably about 72°C, for example about 75°C, and the treatment time measured in accordance with Method No. 1 To be in the range of about 15 minutes to about 2 hours, for example from about 30 minutes to about 1 hour.
In one embodiment, where the curing time is measured in accordance with Method 2, the curing temperature is defined as the target exhaust air temperature, and the starting point of the curing step is defined as the time point at which the exhaust air temperature reaches the curing temperature. . The end point of the treatment step is defined as (1) the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, after which the exhaust air temperature falls below the treatment temperature by more than about 10°C and/or below the lower end of the temperature range The temperature of ductility of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example less than about 62 C, as a near-planar temperature, or (2) the point in time at which the exhaust air temperature drops below the process temperature in a temperature curve Heat on The shape of a parabolic parabola or triangular triangle. It is preferable to begin the treatment step according to Method No. 2 when the exhaust air temperature reaches a treatment temperature of at least about 62°C, or at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, and preferably at least about 72°C, or at least about 75°C. In preferred embodiments, the temperature curve during the treatment step shows a nearly flat picture, where the treatment temperature, i.e., the target exhaust air temperature, is preferably at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, or at least about 72°C, over For example, the target exhaust air temperature is about 68°C, or about 70°C, or about 72°C, or 75°C, or about 78°C. It is preferable for the treatment time, which is measured according to method No. 2, to be in a range ranging from about one minute to about two hours. More than about 5 minutes To about 90 minutes, for example the processing time is about 5 minutes, or about 10 minutes, or about 15 minutes, or about 30 minutes, or about 60 minutes, or about 70 minutes, or about 75 minutes, or about 90 minutes. In a more preferable embodiment, the curing time, measured according to Method 2, is in the range from about 15 minutes to about 1 hour.
In another embodiment, where the curing time is measured in accordance with Method 3, the curing temperature is defined as the target temperature for the extended release matrix formulations, and the starting point of the curing step is defined as the time point at which the temperature of the matrix formulations reached Extended release die, which can be measured for example with an IR gun, to the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined as (1) the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, after which the temperature of the extended-release die formulations drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10°C and/or below the limit The lower end of the ductility temperature range for high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62°C, as a near-planar temperature, or (2) the point in time at which the temperature of the extended-release template formulations drops below Processing heat in a temperature curve in the form of a parabolic or triangular triangle. The curing step according to Method 1 should preferably begin when the temperature of the extended-release template formulations has reached a curing temperature of at least about 62°C, or at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, and preferably at least about 72°C, or at least about 75°C. the least.
In another embodiment, where the curing time is measured in accordance with Method 4, the curing temperature is defined as the target temperature measured using a temperature probe, such as a wire thermocouple, placed within the curing device near the mold formulations. Extended release, the starting point of the curing step is defined as the point in time at which the temperature measured using a temperature probe, placed inside the curing device near the die formulas, is reached. Extended release, to the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined as (1) the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, after which the temperature measured using a temperature probe falls below the curing temperature by more than about 10°C and/or less of the lower limit of the temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility, e.g. below about 62°C, as a near-planar temperature, or (ii) the point in time at which the temperature as measured using a temperature probe decreases temperature probe below the processing temperature in a temperature profile curve in the form of a parabolic or triangular triangle.
The curing step according to Method 4 should preferably begin when the temperature measured using a temperature probe, placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations, reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62°C. Or about 68 m at least, or about 70 m at least, and preferably about 72 m at least, or about 75 m at least. In a preferred embodiment, the temperature curve during the curing step shows a nearly flat profile, where the curing temperature, i.e., the target temperature measured using a temperature probe placed inside the curing medium near the extended-release die formulations, is preferred to be about At least 68°C, for example it is about 70°C, and the curing time, which is measured according to Method No. 4, should preferably be in a range ranging from about 15 minutes to about 2 hours. For example, the curing time is about 60 minutes or About 90 minutes.
If curing is performed in a convection curing device, the curing time may be measured by any of Methods 1, 2, 3, or 4. In a preferred embodiment, the curing time is measured using Method 2.
In certain embodiments, the curing temperature is defined as the target temperature range, for example, the curing temperature is defined as the inlet air temperature range or exhaust air temperature range. . In such embodiments, the starting point of the curing step is defined as the point in time at which the lower end of the target temperature range is reached, and the end point of the curing step is defined as the point in time at which heating is stopped or at least reduced, The temperature then drops to more than about 10°C below the lower limit of the target temperature range and/or below the lower limit of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide ductility temperature range, for example less than about 62°C.
The curing time, i.e. more specifically the period of time during which the extended release matrix formulation is exposed, which can for example be measured according to methods 1, 2, 3 and 4 according to the above description, is about 1 minute or at least about 5 minutes . The treatment time can be changed from about 1 minute to about 24 hours, or from about 5 minutes to about 20 hours, or from about 10 minutes to about 15 hours, or from about 15 minutes to about 10 minutes, or from about 30 minutes to about 5 Hours based on specific composition, formulation, and processing temperature. The composition, curing time, and curing temperature variables are selected to achieve tamper resistant as described herein. Depending on specific models, the processing time varies from about 15 minutes to about 30 minutes. According to other embodiments, where the curing time is at least about 60 m, or at least about 62 m, and preferably at least about 68 m, or at least about 70 m, or at least about 72 m, or at least about 75 m, or varying from about 62 m to about 85 AD, or from about 65 AD to about 85 AD. It is preferable for the treatment time to be at least 15 minutes, at least 30 minutes, at least 60 minutes, at least 75 minutes, at least 90 minutes, or at least 120 minutes. In preferred embodiments, wherein the curing temperature is, for example, at least about 62°C, or at least about 68°C, or at least about 70°C, and preferably at least about 72°C, or at least about 75°C, or a range from about 62°C to About 80 AD, or from about 65 AD to about 80 AD, or from about 68 AD to about 80 AD, or from about 70 AD to about 80 AD, or from about 72 AD to about 80 AD. It is preferable for the treatment time to be at least about one minute or about 5 minutes. Preferably, the treatment time should be at least 15 minutes or at least 30 minutes. In such embodiments, the processing time can be chosen to be as short as possible while still achieving the required tamper resistant. For example, it is preferable for the treatment time not to exceed 5 hours, preferably not to exceed 3 hours, and most preferably not to exceed 2 hours. It is preferable for the treatment time to be in the range of about 1 minute to about 5 hours, from about 5 minutes to about 3 hours, from about 15 minutes to about 2 hours, and from about 15 minutes to about 1 hour. Any combination of curing temperatures and curing times as disclosed herein falls within the scope of the present invention.
In certain embodiments, the formulation is defined only to the curing temperature until the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release matrix formulation reaches its ductility temperature and/or at least partially melts. In such specific embodiments, the processing time can be less than about 5 minutes, for example, the processing time can vary from about 0 minutes to about 3 hours, or from about 1 minute to about 2 hours, or from about 2 minutes to about 3 hours. About one hour. Instant curing can be performed by selecting a curing method that allows the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release mold formulation to be immediately heated to at least its softening temperature, until the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least partially melted. These treatment methods are, for example, microwave ovens, ultrasound devices, a light irradiation device such as a UV-irradiation device, or ultra-high frequency fields. frequeny (UHF), or any method known to those skilled in the field.
Those skilled in the art understand that the size of the extended release matrix formulation can determine the curing time and curing temperature required to achieve the desired tamper resistant. To avoid being bound by any theory, it is believed that in the case of a large continuous release block formulation, such as a large tablet, a longer processing time to conduct heat into the formulation is necessary than in the case of a corresponding smaller volume formulation. The higher temperature increases the thermal conductivity rate, thus reducing the required processing time.
Processing step (c) can be performed in an oven. Advantageously, curing step (c) occurs in a continuous-release free flowing matrix, such as a coating pan. The encapsulation vessel allows for an efficient batch processing step that can be followed by an encapsulation step without the need to transfer dosage forms, eg tablets. This process may include the following steps:
(a) Merge at least.
(1) At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and
(2) at least one active agent,
To create a composition;
(b) Forming said composition to form an extended release matrix formulation in the form of a direct compression tablet; And
(c) Treating the aforementioned curing tablet by:
- Expose a layer of free flowing discs to a temperature range of 62°C to about 90°C, preferably from about 70°C to about 90°C, for a period of time of at least about 1 minute or at least 5 minutes, preferably at least 30 minutes, in a container coating pan packaging, and
- Subsequent cooling of the layer of free flowing tablets to a temperature less than about 50°C.
And then:
(d) Packaging the dosage form in the aforementioned packaging container.
In certain embodiments, an additional curing step may be added after step (d) of encapsulating the dosage form. An additional dosing step may be performed as mentioned in processing step (c). In such specific embodiments, the curing temperature of the further curing step is preferably at least about 70 C, or at least about 72 C, or at least about 75 C. The curing time should preferably be in the range of about 15 minutes to about an hour, for example about 30 minutes.
In certain embodiments, an antioxidant is added, eg BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene).
In certain embodiments, the curing step (c) results in a reduction in the density matrix formulation of the extended release, such that the density of the annealed extended release formulation is less than the density of the extended-release matrix formulation prior to the curing step (c). It is preferable that the density of the hardened extended-release formulation be at least 0.5% less than the density of the non-hardening extended-release formulation. It is more preferable for the density of the sclerosing extended-release formulation to be reduced by at least 0.7%, at least 0.8%, at least 1.0%, at least 2.0%, or at least 2.5%. Without adhering to any theory, it is believed that the extended release mold formulation expands due to the absence of high pressure during processing step (c), which results in a decrease in density.
According to an additional feature of the invention, the density matrix formulation of the extended-release matrix formulation in the extended-release solid oral dosage form, preferably in a dosage form containing oxycodone hydrochloride as an active agent, is equal to or less than about 1.20 g /cm3. Preferably, it is equal to or less than about 1.19 g/cm3, or equal to or less than about 1.18 g/cm3, or equal to or less than about 1.17 g/cm3, or equal to or less than about. For example, the density of an extended-release template formulation is in the range from about 1.10 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3, more preferably from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.18 g/cm3.
It is preferable to determine the density of the extended-release template formula by the Archimedes principle using a liquid with a known density (ρ0). The extended release matrix formulation is weighed in air, immersed in a liquid and weighed. From these two weights, the density of the extended release die formula ρ can be determined by the following equation:
<img file="SA2709B1_D0001.tif" />
Where ρ is the density of the extended-release formula, A is the weight of the extended-release formula in air, B is the weight of the extended-release formula when immersed in a liquid, and ρ0 is the density of the liquid at a given temperature. A suitable liquid with a known density ρ0 is, for example, hexane.
The density of an extended-release block formulation is preferably measured using a Top-loading Mettler Toledo instrument, Model No. AB 135-S/FACT, serial 1127430072, and Density Determination Kit 33360. The hexane is preferably used as a liquid hexane with a known density ρ0.
The density values throughout this document correspond to the density of the extended-release die formulation at room temperature.
The density matrix formulation of extended release should preferably refer to the density of uncoated formulation, for example, the density of core tablet. In those embodiments, where the extended release matrix formulation is encapsulated, for example, where the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to an encapsulation step (d) after a curing step (c), it is preferable to measure the density of the matrix formulation Extended release before performing the encapsulation step, or by removing the encapsulation form from an extended release encapsulated template formulation and then measuring the density of the unencapsulated extended release template formulation.
In the embodiments described above, high molecular weight polyethylene oxide may be used having an approximate molecular weight that, based on rheological measurements, ranges from 2,000,000 to 15,000,000 or from 2,000,000 to 8,000,000. Specifically, polyethylene oxides may be used having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of 2,000,000, 4,000,000, 7,000,000, or 8,000,000. In particular, polyethylene oxides having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of 4,000,000 can be used.
In embodiments where the composition also includes at least one polyethylene oxide of low molecular weight, polyethylene oxides having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of 1,000,000 may be used, such as polyethylene oxides having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of 900,000. An additive such as low molecular weight polyethylene oxides can be used specifically to adjust the release rate such as enhancing the release rate of a formula that would otherwise provide a release rate to slow down the specific purpose. In such embodiments, at least one polyethylene oxide may be used having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of 100.00.
In such specific embodiments, wherein the composition includes at least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, and at least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000 .000, wherein the composition includes at least 10% (by weight) or at least about 20% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000,000. In such embodiments, the curing temperature is less than about 80°C or even less than about 77°C.
In certain embodiments, the total polyethylene oxide content in the composition is at least about 80% (by weight). Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that high polyethylene oxide contents provide resistance to tampering as stated herein, such as resistance to breakage and resistance to alcohol extraction. According to such specific embodiments, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, and the composition includes more than about 5% (by weight) oxycodone hydrochloride.
In certain embodiments, the content in the composition of at least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, is at least about 80% (by weight). In certain embodiments, the content in the composition of at least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, is at least about 85% (by weight) or at least about 90% (by weight). In such embodiments, polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 4,000,000 or at least 7,000,000 may be used. In such embodiments, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride, although other active agents may be used according to this aspect of the invention, and the composition includes more than about 5% (by weight) of oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride.
In certain embodiments, where the amount of drug in the composition is at least 20% (by weight), the polyethylene oxide content can be as low as 75% (by weight). In another embodiment, the amount drug in the composition can be in the range from about 25% (by weight) to about 35% (by weight), and the polyethylene oxide content can be in the range from 65% (by weight) to about 75% (by weight). By weight). For example, in embodiments where the amount of drug in the composition is about 32% (by weight), the polyethylene oxide content can be about 67% (by weight).
In certain embodiments according to the invention, magnesium stearate is added during or after the curing process/curing step to avoid tablets sticking together. In such specific embodiments, magnesium stearate is added at the end of the curing process/curing step before or during cooling of the tablets. Other anti-adhesion agents that may be used: talc, fumed silica, colloidal silica dioxide, silica stearate, carnauba wax, long chain fatty alcohols and waxes, such as stearic acid, stearyl alcohol, mineral oil, Paraffin, micro crystalline cellulose, glycerin, propylene glycol, and polyethylene glycol. In addition or alternatively, encapsulation can be initiated at elevated temperature.
In certain embodiments, where curing step (c) is carried out in a coating pan, tablet sticking can be avoided or sticking tablets separated by increasing pan speed during or after the curing step, in the second case for example before Or while the discs are cooling. The bowl speed is increased to a speed at which all tablets are separated or no sticking occurs.
In certain embodiments of the invention, an initial film coating or part of a film coating is used before performing the curing step (c). A film coating provides an "overcoat" for extended-release matrix formulations or tablets to act as an anti-tacking agent, more specifically to avoid sticking of formulas or tablets to each other. In such specific embodiments, the film coating used prior to the curing step is an opadry film coating. After processing step (c), an additional film coating step can be performed.
The present invention also includes any extended release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form that may be obtained by a process according to any process described above.
Independently, the present invention is directed to solid oral extended-release pharmaceutical dosage forms.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage forms comprising an extended-release block formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or individual multiparticles can They become at least flattened without breaking, and are characterized by a disc or individual particle having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or particle. Individualization prior to flattening, whereby said flattened tablet or flattened multi particulates provide the in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated enteric fluid Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount of active agent released at 0.5 h, or at 0.5 and 0.75 h, or at 0.5, 0.75, and 1 h, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1. 5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates by no more than about 20% at each of the time points mentioned from the corresponding dissolution rate in the laboratory for a non-flat reference tablet or non-flat reference particulates.
In such specific embodiments, the disc or individual multiple particles can become at least flattened without breaking, and the disc or individual multiple particles are characterized by having a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 50% or 40%, or 30%. %, 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the tablet or individual polyparticle before flattening, wherein said flattened tablet or polyparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP device Type 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h or at 0.5 and 0.75 h , or at 0.5, 0.75, and 1 hour, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, and 2 hours of melting that deviates by no more than about 20% points, or about 15% points at each From the time points mentioned from the corresponding dissolution rate in vitro for a reference tablet Non-flattened or non-flattened reference particles.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended-release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet Or individual multiple particles can become at least flattened without breaking, and are characterized by the disc or individual multiple particles having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or The individual multiparticle before flattening, where said flattened tablet or flattened multi particulates and the non-flattened reference tablet or reference non-flattened multi particulates provide the in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP instrument Type 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, ranging from about 5 to about 40% (by weight) of active agent released after 0.5 hours.
In such specific embodiments, the disc or individual multi particulates can at least become flattened without breaking, characterized by the disc or individual multiparticle having a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 50% or 40%, or 30%, 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the tablet or single multiparticle before flattening, where the aforementioned flattened tablet or flattened multiparticle and the unflattened reference tablet or particulate are The non-flattened reference provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, in the range From about 5 to about 40% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hours, or ranging from about 5 to about 30% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hours, or from about 5 to about 20 % (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hour, or ranges from about 10 to about 18% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hour.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or Individual polyparticles can become at least flattened without breaking, and the disc or individual particulate matter has a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness. Individual tablet or particulates before flattening. A flattened or flattened tablet or flattened or non-flattened multiparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 cycles per minute. minute in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hour, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of melting which deviates by no more than about 20% points at each time point from the corresponding melting rate Corresponding dissolution rate in vitro, measured with a USP type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C, for flat and non-flat reference tablet or reference multi particulates Flat and non-flat, respectively.
In such specific embodiments, the tablet or individual multiple particles can at least become flattened without breaking, and the tablet or individual multiple particles have a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 60%, 50%, or 40%. Or 30%, 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the tablet or individual multi particulate before flattening. Flat provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and containing 40% ethanol at 37°C. As a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 hours, or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, and 1 hour, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1. 5 and two hours of dissolution which deviates no more than about 20% points or about 15% One point at each time point of the corresponding in vitro dissolution rate, measured with a USP type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C , for flat and non-flat reference tablet or flat and non-flat reference particles, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, wherein the tablet or particulates The individual polyptych can at least become flattened without breaking, and is characterized by the disc or pipicle having a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or pipicle. Individual multi particulate before flattening, as a flattened or non-flattened tablet or flattened multi particulates provides a dissolution rate in the laboratory, when measured with a USP type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and comprising 40% ethanol or 0% ethanol at 37°C, ranging from about 5 to about 40% (by weight) of the agent The active agent is released after 0.5 hours.
In such specific embodiments, the disk or individual multiple particles can at least become flattened without breaking, characterized by the disk or individual multiple particles having a thickness after flattening corresponding to no more than about 50%, 40%, or 30%, or 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the tablet or individual microparticle before flattening, whereby the flattened or flattened tablet or flattened or non-flattened polyparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated intestinal fluid without enzymes and containing 40% or 0% ethanol at 37°C, ranging from about 5 to about 40% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 h , or ranges from about 5 to about 30% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hours, or ranges from about 5 to about 20% (by weight) of the active agent released after 0.5 hours, or ranges from about 10 Up to about 18% (by weight) of the active agent is released after 0.5 hours.
Such dosage forms may be prepared as described above.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
At least one active agent, preferably selected from an opioid analgesics; And
The composition contains at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide. The composition may also include at least about 85% or 90% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide. According to such embodiments, where the composition comprises at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride, and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by weight) of oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride. .
In such specific embodiments, the composition comprises at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least 85% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
15 1 mg or 20 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
40 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least 65% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
60 mg or 80 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least about 60% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, wherein the extended release matrix formulation comprises
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
8 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least 94% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
12 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least 92% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
32 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride; And
The composition contains at least about 90% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release template formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one active agent, preferably selected from an opioid analgesics;
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000,000; In such specific embodiments, the composition comprises at least about 80% (by weight) polyethylene oxide. The composition may also comprise at least about 85% or 90% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide. According to such embodiments, where the composition comprises at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride, and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by weight) of oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride. . The composition may also include from 15 to 30% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; From 65 to 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide has an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of less than 1,000,000, or the composition may include at least about 20% (by weight), or about 30% (by weight) of The least, or at least about 50% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide, has a molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of At least 1,000,000.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having a molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 800,000 or at least 900,000; And
At least one active agent selected from an opioid analgesics; And
The composition contains at least about 80% (by weight) of polyethylene oxide.
In certain embodiments of the invention, the extended release mold has a density less than or equal to about 1.20 g/cm3. In such embodiments, the density matrix formulation for extended release is less than or equal to about 1.19 g/cm3, preferably less than or equal to about 1.18 g/cm3, or less than or equal to about 1.17 g/cm3. For example, the density of an extended-release template formulation is in the range from about 1.10 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3. Preferably in a range from about 1.12 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3, or from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3, and more preferably from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.18 g/cm3. It is preferable to determine density using the Archimedes principle, as described above.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, wherein the extended release matrix formulation comprises
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
At least one active agent; And
When the extended-release die formulation is subjected to an indentation test, it has a cracking force of approximately 110 Newtons.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, the extended-release die formulation has a cracking force of at least about 110 Newtons, preferably at least about 120 Newtons, at least 130 Newtons, at least 140 Newtons, and more preferably at least about 150 Newtons, Or at least 160 Newtons, or at least 170 Newtons, and more preferably at least about 180 Newtons, or at least about 190 Newtons, or at least about 200 Newtons.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release matrix formulation includes:
A composition consisting of at least:
At least one polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000; And
At least one active agent; And
When the extended-release die formulation is subjected to an indentation test, it has a “penetration depth to crack distance” of approximately 1.0 mm.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, the extended-release die formulation has a “slit depth distance” of at least about 1.0 mm, or at least about 1.2 mm, preferably at least about 1.4 mm, or at least about 1.5 mm, or at least about 1.6 mm. , more preferably at least about 1.8 mm, or at least about 1.9 mm, or at least about 2.0 mm, and most preferably at least about 2.2 mm, or at least about 2.4 mm, or at least about 2.6 mm.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, the extended-release die formulation has a cracking force of at least about 110 Newtons, preferably at least about 120 Newtons, at least 130 Newtons, at least 140 Newtons, and more preferably at least about 150 Newtons, or at least 160 N, or at least 170 N, more preferably at least about 180 N, or at least about 190 N, or at least about 200 N, and/or a “crack depth distance” of at least about 1.0 mm, or At least about 1.2 mm, preferably at least about 1.4 mm, or at least about 1.5 mm or at least about 1.6 mm, more preferably at least about 1.8 mm, or at least about 1.9 mm, or at least about 2.0 mm, more preferably at least about 2.2 mm, or at least about 2.4 mm, Or at least about 2.6 mm. Any combination of any of the foregoing values of crushing force and "crack depth distance" is included within the scope of the invention.
In such specific embodiments, the extended release die formulation, when subjected to an indentation test, resists work of at least about 0.06 J, or at least about 0.08 J, and preferably at least about 0.09 J, or at least about 0.11 J, Or at least about 0.13 joules, and more preferably at least about 0.15 joules, or at least about 0.17 joules, or at least about 0.19 joules, and more preferably at least about 0.21 joules, or at least about 0.23 joules, or at least about 0.25 joules. .
The variables “cracking force,” “penetration depth to crack distance,” and “work” in an indentation test are determined as described above using a texture analyzer such as the TA-XT2 texture analyzer (from:
texture technologies corp., 18 fairview road, scarsdale, ny 10583). It is possible to determine the cracking force and/or “crack depth distance” using a matrix formulation, laminated or unlaminated with extended release. The crushing strength and/or “crack depth distance” are preferably determined using the extended release uncoated die formula. Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that an encapsulation layer, such as the coating performed in step (d) of the solid oral extended-release dosage form manufacturing process as described above, does not contribute significantly to the observed crushing strength and/or “Crack depth distance.” Therefore, the cracking force and/or crack depth distance determined for a specific extended release coated matrix formulation would not be expected to differ significantly from the values determined for the corresponding uncoated matrix formulation.
In certain embodiments, the extended-release matrix formulation is in the form of a tablet or multiple particulates, the tablet or individual multiparticles being able to become at least flattened without breaking, characterized by the tablet or individual multiparticle having a thickness after flattening It corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or individual microparticle before flattening. It is preferable for the disc or individual multiple particles to become at least flat without breaking, and it is characterized that the disc or individual multiple particles has a thickness after flattening that does not exceed about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the tablet or individual microparticle before flattening.
Flattening of tablets or individual particles is preferably done using a bench press, such as a Carver bench press, or using a hammer, as described above.
In such specific embodiments, the extended release template formulation is in the form of a tablet or multiple particles, the tablet or individual multi particulates can at least become flat without breaking, and the individual multiparticle tablet or particle is characterized by The thickness after flattening corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the disc or individual microparticle before flattening, as the aforementioned flattened tablet or multiparticle Flattened multi particulates provide a dissolution rate in vitro, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, with a Percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h, or at 0.5 and 0.75 h, or at 0.5, 0.75, and 1 h, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 h, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 Two hours of dissolution, which deviates no more than about 20% point at Each of the time points given is from the corresponding dissolution rate in the laboratory for a non-flat reference tablet or non-flat reference particle. It is preferable for the tablet or individual multiple particles to become at least flat without breaking, and it is characterized that the tablet or individual multiple particles has a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than about 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, or 16% of Thickness of tablet or individual polyparticle before flattening, whereby said flattened tablet or polyparticle provides the in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP type 1 (basket) device at 100 cycles per minute in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h or at 0.5 and 0.75 h, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 h , or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, and 2 hours of melting that deviates by no more than about 20% points or about 15% points at each of the time points mentioned from the corresponding melting rate. dissolution rate in vitro for a reference tablet other than Flat or non-flattened reference particles.
In certain embodiments, the invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral dosage form (EX). comprising an extended-release matrix formulation, wherein the extended-release template formulation is in the form of a tablet or multiparticle form particulates, and the disc or individual multi particulates can become at least flat without breaking, and is characterized by the fact that the disc or individual multi particulates has a thickness after flattening that corresponds to no more than Approximately 60% of the thickness of a single tablet or microparticle before flattening, as a flattened or flattened tablet or flattened or flattened multiparticle provides an in vitro dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 (basket) device at 100 cycles per minute in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount active released at 0.5 h or at 0.5 and 0.75 h, or at 0.5 and 0.75 and 1 hour, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates by no more than about 20% points at all time points from the corresponding dissolution rate Corresponding dissolution rate in vitro, measured with a USP type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C, for a flat and non-flat reference tablet or flat and non-flat reference multi particulates Flat, in order. It is preferable for the tablet or multi particulates to become at least flattened without breaking, and it is characterized that the tablet or individual multi particulate has a thickness after flattening that does not exceed about 60%, 50%, 40%, or 30%, 20%, or 16% of the thickness of the individual tablet or particle before flattening, as the flattened or flattened tablet or flattened or nonflattened multiple particle provides a dissolution rate dissolution rate in vitro, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes and containing 40% ethanol at 37°C, characterized by a percentage of the amount of factor Effective amount active released at 0.5 hours, or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, and 1 hour, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, and 1.5 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, and 2 hours of dissolution Which deviates no more than about 20% points or about 15% points at each of the time points Points given are from the corresponding dissolution rate in vitro, measured with a USP type 1 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated intestinal fluid without enzymes and without ethanol at 37°C, for a non-flat, non-flat reference tablet. Flat, non-flattened or reference multi particulates.
In such embodiments, the extended release matrix formulation does not break when subjected to a maximum force of about 196 N or about 439 N in a tablet hardness test.
It is preferable to perform a tablet hardness test to determine the resistance of extended-release die formulations to fracture using a Schleuniger device according to what was described above. For example, fracture strength is determined using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device, applying a maximum force of about 196 N, or using a Schleuniger Model 6D device, applying a maximum force of about 439 N.
It has been observed that the formulas according to the present invention are storage stable, whereby the extended-release template formula is stored at 25°C 60% relative humidity or 40°C 75% relative humidity for at least one month, preferably for at least two months, or At least 3 months, or at least 6 months, provides a dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37m, characterized by a percentage of quantity The amount active agent released at 1 hour, or at 1 hour and 2 hours, or at 1 hour and 4 hours, or at 1 hour and 2 hours and 4 hours, or at 1 hour and 4 and 12 hours, or at 1 hour and 2 hours and 4 and 8 hours, or at 1 hour, 2 hours, 4, 8, and 12 hours of melting that deviates by no more than about 15% points, and preferably not more than 12% points, or not more than about 10% points, and preferably not more than about 8% points, or not more than about 6% points. It is most preferable that it does not exceed about 5% points at each of the mentioned time points The corresponding dissolution rate in the laboratory of a reference formula before storage. The extended-release block formulation is preferably stored in count bottles. Any combination of the above storage times, dissolution time points, and deviation limits are within the scope of the invention.
According to an additional characteristic of storage stability, the extended release matrix formulation has been stored at 25°C 60% relative humidity or 40°C 75% relative humidity for at least 1 month, preferably at least 2 months, or 3 At least 6 months, or at least 6 months, containing a % (by weight) amount of at least one active agent relative to that declared on the active agent label for the extended-release block formulation that deviates by not more than 10% points, preferably not more than 8% points or not more than 6% points, and more preferably not more than 5% points or not more than 4% points or not more than 3% points of the corresponding amount of the active agent in % (by weight) for To what is declared on the active agent label for an extended-release block formulation of a reference formulation prior to storage. An extended-release block formulation is preferably stored in count bottles, such as 100 count bottles. Any combination of storage times and deviation limits mentioned above is within the scope of the invention.
In such embodiments, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride.
It is preferable that the percentage (by weight) of at least one amount active relative to what is declared on the active agent label for the extended-release template formulation be determined by extracting at least one active agent from the extended-release template formulation and performing subsequent analysis using... High-performance liquid chromatography. In certain embodiments, where at least one active agent of oxycodone hydrochloride is specified, the percentage amount of oxycodone hydrochloride relative to that declared on the oxycodone hydrochloride label for the extended-release template formulation is preferred, by extracting the oxycodone hydrochloride from the extended-release template formulation using Mixture at 1: 2 of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes under constant magnetic stirring until the extended release matrix formulation is fully dispersed or overnight and subsequent analysis using high-performance liquid chromatography, preferably chromatography High performance reversed-phase fluid. In such embodiments, where the extended-release template formulation is in tablet form, the % (by weight) amount of oxycodone hydrochloride for the declared oxycodone hydrochloride for tablets is preferably determined by extracting oxycodone hydrochloride from two lots of ten tablets, each using 900 mL of Mixture at 1: 2 of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes under constant magnetic stirring until the extended-release template formulation is completely dispersed or overnight and subsequent analysis using a high-performance liquid chromatograph, preferably a reverse-phase high-performance liquid chromatograph . It is preferable that the test results be average values in the two measurements.
In certain embodiments, the invention is directed to an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form, wherein the dosage form provides a dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of Simulated intestinal fluid without enzymes at 37°C, between 12.5 and 55% (by weight) of active agent released after 1 hour, between 25 and 65% (by weight) of active agent released after 2 hours, and between 45 and 85% (by weight) of active agent released After 4 hours, between 55 and 95% (by weight) of the active agent released after 6 hours, and optionally between 75 and 100% (by weight) of the active agent released after 8 hours. Preferably, the dosage form provides a dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, between 15 and 45 % (by weight) of the active agent released after 1 hour, between 30 and 60% (by weight) of the active agent released after 2 hours, between 50 and 80% (by weight) of the active agent released after 4 hours, and between 60 and 90 % (by weight) of active agent released after 6 hours, Optionally between 80 and 100% (by weight) of the active agent is released after 8 hours. It is more preferable that the dosage form provide a dissolution rate, when measured with a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated enteric fluid without enzymes at 37°C, of 17.5 to 30% (by weight) of the active agent Which is released after 1 hour, and between 35 and 55% (by weight) of the active agent that is released after 2 hours, and between 55 and 75% (by weight) of the active agent that is released after 4 hours, and between 65 and 85% (by weight) of the active agent Which is released after 6 hours, and optionally between 85 and 100% (by weight) of the agent Effectively released after 8 hours.
In such embodiments, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride.
These dosage forms may be prepared by following the process described herein.
In the above embodiments, the tablet may be formed by direct compression of the composition, cured by at least exposing said tablet to a temperature of at least about 60, at least about 62, at least about 68, at least about 70, or at least about 72 At least, or at least about 75 for a period of at least 1 minute, at least 5 minutes, or at least 15 minutes.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, the tablets described above may be further coated with a powder layer of polyethylene oxide by placing on the cured or uncured tablet a powder layer of polyethylene oxide surrounding the core, and treating the powder layer tablet as described above.
In certain embodiments according to the invention, a double-layered tablet or multiple layer is manufactured, wherein at least one layer contains an extended-release formulation as described above and at least one other layer contains an immediate-release formulation of the agent. The active agent included in the extended-release formulation or a second, different active agent. In such embodiments, the tablet is dual- or multi-layer, with one layer containing an extended-release formulation as described herein and one layer containing an immediate-release formulation. In such embodiments, particularly bi-layered tablets, opioid analgesics are included in the extended-release layer and non-opioid analgesics are also included in the immediate-release layer. Non-opioid analgesics can be non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, but also non-opioid analgesics such as acetaminophen. Acetaminophen may be used in combination with hydrocodone as an opioid analgesic. Such tablets may be prepared using certain tablet compression techniques called for compressing at least two compositions to form tablets with at least two distinct layers, each containing at least one of the two compositions. For example, such tablets could be manufactured in a tablet press by filling the compression tool with the first composition, compressing that first composition, then filling with the second composition on top of the first compressed composition, and then compressing both compositions to form the final two-layer tablet. The immediate-release formulation may be any formulation known in the art.
The invention also includes the use of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide having an approximate molecular weight, based on rheological measurements, of at least 1,000,000, in the form of a matrix in the manufacture of an extended-release solid oral dosage form comprising An active agent selected from opioids to give the extended-release solid oral dosage form resistant to alcohol extraction. Use may be accomplished as stated herein in connection with the described process, described formulas, or by any conventional method known in the art.
It has been observed that formulations according to the present invention comprising high molecular weight polyethylene oxide can be flattened to a thickness ranging from about 15 to about 18% of the non-flattened thickness, and that the flat tablet partially or substantially recovers its initial non-flat shape. Non flattened shape during dissolution, neglecting the swelling that occurs during dissolution. More specifically, the thickness of the disc increases and the diameter decreases significantly during dissolution. Without being bound by any theory, it is believed that high molecular weight polyethylene oxide has an image memory and the ability to recover the initial image after deformation, for example after flattening, in an environment that allows for recovery, such as an aqueous environment used in dissolution tests. This ability is believed to contribute to tamper resistant and, in particular, resistant alcohol extraction of dosage forms according to the present invention.
The invention also includes a treatment method where the dosage form is given to treat a specific disease or condition to a patient who needs treatment, especially treatment for pain, and the dosage form is used according to the invention to manufacture a medicine to treat a specific disease or condition or a patient who needs treatment, especially treatment for pain.
In one aspect of the present invention, an extended-release solid oral dosage form is provided to be administered twice daily, having an average tmax ranging from about 2 to about 6 hours, or from about 2.5 to about 5.5 hours, or from Approximately 2.5 to approximately 5 hours after administration at steady state or administered as a single dose to test subjects. The dosage form may include oxycodone or a salt thereof or hydromorphone or a salt thereof.
In one aspect of the present invention, a once-daily extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, having an average Tmax ranging from about 3 hours to about 10 hours, or from about 4 to about 9 hours, Or about 5 to about 8 hours after administration at steady state or given as a single dose to test subjects. The dosage form may include oxycodone or a salt thereof or hydromorphone or a salt thereof.
In another aspect according to the invention, an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form is provided to be administered twice daily, wherein the dosage form comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof in an amount ranging from about 10 mg to about 160 mg, and wherein the dosage provides an average final plasma Cmax. of oxycodone reaches about 240 ng/mL or ranges from about 6 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL after steady-state or single-dose administration to test subjects.
In another aspect according to the invention, an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, wherein the dosage form comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof in an amount ranging from about 10 mg to about 40 mg, and wherein the dosage provides an average final plasma Cmax of oxycodone ranging from About 6 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL after steady-state or single-dose administration to test subjects.
In another aspect according to the invention, an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form is provided that is bioequivalent to the commercial product OxyContinTM.
In another aspect of the invention, an extended-release solid oral dosage form is provided that is bioequivalent to the commercial product PalladoneTM sold in the United States in 2005.
In another aspect of the invention, an extended-release solid oral pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, wherein the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, and wherein the dosage form comprising 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride when tested in a corresponding clinical study is equivalent Biologics of a reference tablet containing 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride in a matrix formulation containing:
(a) Oxycodone hydrochloride: 10.0 mg/tablet
(b) Lactose (spray-dried): 69.25 mg/tablet
(c) povidone: 5.0 mg/tablet
(d) Eudragit RS 30D (solids): 10.0 mg/tablet
(e) Triacetin: 2.0 mg/tablet
(f) stearyl alcohol: 25.0 mg/tablet
(g) talc: 2.5 mg/tablet
(h) magnesium stearate: 1.25 mg/tablet;
The reference tablet is prepared by following the following steps:
1. Eudragit RS 30D and Triacetin are combined while passing through a 250 micron screen sieve, and mixed under low shear for approximately 5 minutes or until uniform dispersion is observed.
2. Oxycodone hydrochloride, lactose, and povidone are placed in a granulator/dryer in the presence of a fluidized bed (FBD), and the suspension is sprayed onto the powder in the fluidized bed.
3. After spraying, granulation is passed through a #12 screen as necessary to reduce lumps.
4. Dry granulation is placed in a mixer.
5. Meanwhile, the required amount of stearyl alcohol is melted at a temperature of approximately 70°C.
6. Molten stearyl alcohol is included in the granulation during mixing.
7. The waxed granulation is transferred to the fluid bed granulator/dryer bowl in the presence of a fluidized bed or trays, and allowed to cool to room temperature or below.
8. The cooled granulation is then passed through a screen #12 sieve.
9. The waxed granulation is placed in a mixing medium and lubricated with the required amounts of talc and magnesium stearate for about 3 minutes.
10. The granulate product is compressed into 125 mg tablets using a suitable tableting machine.
Pharmacokinetic variables such as Cmax, tmax, AUCt, AUCinf etc. that describe the blood plasma curve can be obtained in clinical trials, by first administering a single dose of the active agent, eg oxycodone, to a group of test subjects, eg Cases from healthy humans. The blood plasma values for the individual test subjects are then averaged, for example the average AUC, Cmax and tmax are obtained.
The Cmax value indicates the maximum concentration of the active agent in blood plasma. The tmax value indicates the time point at which the Cmax value is reached. In other words, the tmax value is the time point of the maximum observed plasma concentration.
The AUC value (i.e., area under the curve) indicates the area of the concentration curve. The AUC value is proportional to the amount active absorbed into the blood circulation as a whole, and is therefore a measure of bioavailability.
The AUCt value indicates the area under the plasma concentration-time curve from the time of administration to the final measurable concentration of plasma, and is calculated using the trapezoidal rule: linear up/log down.
AUCinf is the area under the concentration curve-time of plasma that is deduced to infinity, and it is calculated using the following equation:
<img file="SA2709B1_D0002.tif" />
Where Ct is the last measurable plasma concentration, and lZ is the apparent terminal phase rate constant.
lZ is the apparent telophase rate constant, where lZ is the magnitude slope linear regression of log concentration versus time profile during telophase.
t1/2Z is the apparent final phase half-life of the plasma, given as t1/2Z = (ln2)/lZ.
The delay time is determined by the time point preceding the first measurable plasma concentration value.
The term “healthy individuals” refers to males or females with average values, regards height, weight, physiological parameters, such as blood pressure, etc. Healthy test subjects for the purposes of the present invention are selected according to inclusion and exclusion criteria that are based on and consistent with the recommendations of the International Conference on Harmonization of Clinical Trials.
Hence, the inclusion principle includes males and females aged from 18 to 50 years, including a body weight ranging from 50 to 100 kg (49.98 kg to 99.79 kg), and a body mass index (BMI) of 18 and 34 (kg/m2), so that All test subjects who are healthy and free of significant abnormalities as determined by medical history, physical examination, vital signs, electrocardiogram, and females who are likely to give birth should use contraception. Sufficient and reliable, such as a barrier containing foam or jelly sufficient to kill spermicide, an intra-uterine device, a hormonal contraception method (hormonal contraceptives alone are not sufficient), and females must not be before menopause, but must One year postmenopausal, with high levels of follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), test subjects were willing to eat all the food provided to them during the study.
Another inclusion principle is that all subjects refrain from strenuous exercise during the entire study, and they should not start a new exercise program or engage in any exceptionally strenuous physical effort.
Exclusion criteria include pregnant females (positive beta test for human chorionic gonadotropin), lactating females, any history of drug abuse or alcohol for five years or current use, and a history or current conditions that may Interfering with absorption, distribution, metabolism, or excretion of the drug, and use of a drug containing an opioid in the last 30 years, a history of a known allergy to oxycodone, naltrexone, or related compounds, a history of frequent nausea or vomiting regardless of the aetiology, any history of seizures or head trauma for which there are current findings, and participation in a clinical drug study within the past 30 years. The last day before the initial dose in this study, any significant illness during the thirty days preceding the first dose in this study, and the use of any medication that includes treatment with thyroid hormones. thyroid hormone (permitting hormonal contraception) and/or vitamins and/or herbal and/or mineral supplements during the seven days preceding the first dose, and refusing to abstain from food for ten hours before administration and four hours after it or for four hours after administration. Study Drugs Abstaining from caffeine or xanthine completely during each restriction condition, and consumption of alcoholic beverages within 48 hours of study drug administration (or day) or at any time following administration first for the study drug, a history of smoking or using nicotine products within 45 days of administration of the study drug or a positive urine cotinine test, and donating donated blood or blood products within 30 days before administration of the study drugs or any time during the study except for a request This is in accordance with the clinical study protocol, positive results in a urine drug screen, an alcohol screen during a comprehensive examination at intervals, and a hepatitis B surface antigen. surface antigen (B), hepatitis B surface antibody (B) (unless immunized), hepatitis C antibody (C), a positive Naloxone HCl challenge test, and the presence of Gilberts Syndrome or Any hepatobiliary abnormalities, and the student believes that the human condition is unsuitable for a reason(s) not stated above.
Individuals who meet the inclusion principle and exceed the exclusion principle will be randomly assigned to the study.
The group that will be included in the study is the group of individuals who will give acknowledgment to the science.
A randomized safety group is the group of individuals who will be randomly assigned to the study, receive the study drug, and will receive at least one post-dose safety assessment.
The full analysis population for pharmacokinetic measurements will be the group of individuals who will be randomized into the study, receive the study drug, and have at least one valid pharmacokinetic measurement. It is possible to include test subjects who experience emesis within 12 hours after a dose based on visual inspection of PK profiles before closing the database. Individuals and curves/measurements excluded from the analysis will be documented in the statistical analysis plan.
For the Naloxone HCl challenge test, vital signs and pulse oximetry (SPO2) are obtained before the Naloxone HCl challenge test. The Naloxone HCl challenge can be given intravenously or subcutaneously subcutaneously. For the intravenous route, the needle or cannula must remain in the arm during administration. 0.2 mg of Naloxone HCl (0.5 ml) is given by intravenous injection. The test subject is observed for 30 seconds to confirm signs or symptoms of withdrawal. Then 0.6 mg of Naloxone HCl (1.5 mL) is given intravenously. The test individual is observed for 20 minutes to detect signs or symptoms of withdrawal. After observation for 20 minutes, vital signs and pulse oximetry (SPO2) are obtained before a Naloxone HCl challenge test.
Vital signs include systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure, pulse rate, respiratory rate, and oral temperature.
As for the question “How do you feel?”, a non-suggestive question of this type will be asked at each vital sign measurement, such as “Have there been any changes in your health condition since the examination/since the last time you were asked?” Each individual's answer will be evaluated to determine if there is an adverse event that should be reported. Individuals will be encouraged to tell volunteers about adverse events that occur to them at any time during the study.
Each test subject receiving an ingested treatment will receive a standard high-fat meal in accordance with “Industry Guidelines: Bioavailability Studies of Food Impact and Bioavailability in Ingested Conditions” (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Food Administration Drug Evaluation and Research Center, December 2002). The meal will be served 30 minutes before the dose, and will be consumed at a constant rate over a 25-minute period so that it is completed 5 minutes before administration.
Clinical laboratory evaluations in clinical studies include biochemistry (if at least ten hours of fasting), hematology, serology, urinalysis, screening for drugs of abuse, and additional tests.
Biochemical evaluations (in fasted state for at least ten hours) include determination of albumin, alkaline phosphatase, and
alanine aminotransferase (alanine transaminase, ALT), and
aspartate aminotransferase (aspartate transaminase, AST), and
Calcium, chloride, creatinine, glucose, inorganic phosphate, and
potassium, sodium, total bilirubin, total protein, urea, and
lactate dehydrogenase (LDH), direct bilirubin, and CO2.
Hematology evaluations include determination of hematocrit, hemoglobin, platelet count, red blood cell count, white blood cell count, and white blood cell differential (% and absolute): basophils, eosinophils, lymphocytes, monocytes, and neutrophils.
Serology evaluations include identification of hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAG), hepatitis B surface antibody (HBsAb), and hepatitis C antibody (anti-HCV).
Urinalysis evaluations include determining color, shape, pH, glucose, ketones, urobilinogen, nitrite, occult blood, protein, leukocyte esterase, microscopic and macroscopic evaluation, and specific gravity.
Screening for drugs of abuse includes a urine screen for opioids, amphetamines, cannabinoids, benzodiazepines, cocaine, cotinine, barbiturates, phencyclidine, methadone, and propoxyphene, and alcohol tests such as blood alcohol and alcohol testing.
Additional testing for females only includes a serum pregnancy test, serum pregnancy test, urine pregnancy test, and follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) serum test (for postmenopausal females who self-report hormone).
Detailed description of preferred models:
The present invention will now be given further elaboration with the accompanying examples. But it should be understood that the following description is for illustration only, and should not be considered a limitation of the invention in any way.
Example No. 1
In Example 1, a 200 mg tablet containing 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride is prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in combination with hydroxypropyl cellulose.
Composition:
Component
mg/unit
٪
oxycodone hydrochloride
10
5
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR-301)
160
80
hydroxypropyl cellulose
(KlucelTM HXF)
30
15
Total
200
100
Manufacturing process:
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
(1) Oxycodone hydrochloride, polyethylene oxide, and hydroxypropyl cellulose were mixed dry in a 1.5 cup capacity black & decker handy chopper dual blade low/high shear blender.
(2) The Step 1 combination was pressed to the target weight using a Manesty F3 single-pass tablet press.
The tablets from step 2 were spread on a tray, and placed in a Hotpack oven model 435304 at 70°C for approximately 14.5 hours to cure the tablets.
Tests performed in the laboratory include tamper resistant (hammer and breaking strength test) and resistant alcohol extraction.
Tablets were tested in vitro using a USP type 2 device (paddle) at 50 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes at 37°C, using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS spectrometer lambda 20, Radiology UV at 230 nM. The results are presented in Table 1-1.
Untreated tablets, treated tablets, tampered tablets such as flat and treated tablets were tested. The flattening of treated tablets was flattened with a hammer using 7 hand hammer strokes to detect physical tampering. Tablet dimensions before and after flattening as well as dissolution profiles were evaluated using separate samples. The results are presented in Table 1-1.
As an additional test for tamper resistance, the treated discs were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate breakage resistance. The results were also presented in Table 1-1.
In addition, the cured tablets were tested in vitro using ethanol/SGF media at 0%, 20%, and 40% ethanol concentrations to evaluate ethanol recovery potential. Testing was performed using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 230 nM. The sample time points included 0.5 hour and 1 hour. The results are presented in Table 1-1.
Processor
Intact, untreated
Salim
Flattening using 7 strokes of a hammer
Disc dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.52 1
4.39 1
2.23 2
Diameter(mm)
-
7.56 1
10.27 2
Breaking strength (Newton)
-
196+ 3
-
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test
-
7.33 1
-
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n = 3 tablets per bowl)
0.5 hours
13
34
33
1 hour
18
46
45
2 hour
28
63
62
4 hour
43
81
83
8 hour
65
86
87
17 hour
85
86
87
1n = average of three measurements 2n = average of 5 measurements.
3 196+ means that by subjecting the discs to a maximum force of 196 N, they did not break, n = average of 3 measurements.
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n = 2 tablets per container)
Time
The ethanol concentration is 0% in SGF
Ethanol concentration of 20% in SGF
The ethanol concentration is 40% in SGF
Untreated
Processor
Untreated
Processor
Untreated
Processor
0.5
13
37
13
32
11
33
22
50
21
46
22
43
Example No. 2
In Example 2, three 200 mg tablets comprising 10 and 20 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in an optional combination with hydroxypropyl cellulose.
Composition:
Example 2.1
Example 2.2
Example 2.3
Component
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone hydrochloride
10
20
10
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000
PolyoxTM WSR-301)
90
80
85
hydroxypropyl cellulose
(KlucelTM HXF)
0
0
5
Total
100
100
100
Manufacturing process:
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
(1) Oxycodone hydrochloride, polyethylene oxide, and hydroxypropyl cellulose were mixed dry in a 1.5 cup capacity Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade low/high shear blender.
(2) The Step 1 combination was pressed to the target weight using a Manesty F3 single-pass tablet press.
(3) The tablets from step 2 were spread on a tray, and placed in a hotpack oven model 435304 at a temperature of 70°C to 75°C for 6 to 9 hours to cure the tablets.
Laboratory tests including tamper resistant testing and breaking strength test were performed as follows.
Cured tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Type 2 device (paddle) at 50 rpm in 500 ml of simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes at 37°C, using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, Radiology UV at 220 nM. Treated tablets and untreated tablets were tested. The flattening of tablets was flattened to 181.44/cm2 using a carver-type bench press to detect physical tampering. The results are presented in Table 2.
As an additional tamper-resistant test, the treated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 to evaluate breakage resistance. The results are also presented in Table 2.
Example No. 2-1
Example No. 2-2
Example No. 2-3
Salim
(n=6)
Flattening with a bench press
Salim
(n=2)
Flattening with a bench press
Salim
(n=5)
Flattening with a bench press
Disc dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.36
0.58
3.14
0.84
3.48
0.49
Diameter(mm)
6.48
12.80
6.58
13.44
6.46
12.86
Fish (%)
-
17.3
-
26.8
-
14.0
Breaking strength (Newton)
196+ 1
n/a
196+ 1
n/a
196 + 1
n/a
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=1)
0.5 hours
34
46
42
50
40
56
1 hour
50
62
57
71
55
72
2 hour
72
78
78
91
77
89
4 hour
81
82
95
93
93
100
8 hour
82
82
95
93
94
100
12 hour
83
82
96
94
95
101
1 196+ means that by exposing the discs to a maximum force of 196 Newtons, they will not break.
Example No. 3:
In Example 3, a 200 mg tablet containing 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride and high molecular weight polyethylene oxide is prepared.
Composition:
Component
mg/unit
٪
oxycodone hydrochloride
10
5
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR301)
188
94
magnesium stearate
2
Total
200
100
Manufacturing process:
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
(1) Oxycodone hydrochloride, polyethylene oxide, and magnesium stearate were mixed in a 1.5 cup capacity Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade low/high shear blender.
(2) The Step 1 combination was compressed to the target weight using a manesty F3 tablet press.
(3) The tablets from step 2 were spread on a tray, and placed in a Hotpack oven model 435304 at 70°C for 1 to 14 hours to cure the tablets.
Tests have been performed in the laboratory including tamper resistant testing (breaking strength test) as follows:
Tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Type 2 device (paddle) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes at 37°C, using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 220 nM, after exposure to treatment for 2, 3, 4, 8, and 14 hours. Dimensions of treated and untreated tablets and dissolution results are shown in Table 3.
As an additional test for tamper resistance, the treated and untreated discs were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 to evaluate breakage resistance. The results are also presented in Table 3.
Table No. 3
not
Processed2
Processing time (hours)
1 1
2 1
4 1
8 1
14 2
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
208
208
209
209
208
210
Thickness (mm)
4.74
5.17
5.25
5.17
5.17
4.85
Diameter(mm)
7.93
7.85
7.80
7.75
7.69
7.64
Breaking strength (Newton)
176
196+3
196+3
196+3
196+3
196+3
Solubility (% released) (n = 2)
0.5 hours
Not tested
Not tested
16
11
15
33
1 hour
23
18
23
50
2 hour
34
28
36
69
4 hour
54
45
58
87
8 hour
81
69
83
93
12 hour
96
83
92
94
1 Disk dimensions n = 4
2 Disk dimensions n = 10
196+3 means that by subjecting the discs to a maximum force of 196 Newtons, they did not break.
In Example 4, six 100 mg tablets (Examples 4-1 through 4-6) comprising 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in combination with hydroxypropyl cellulose.
Composition:
1-4
2-4
3-4
4-4
4-5
4-6
Component
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone hydrochloride
10
10
10
10
10
10
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
(PolyoxTM WSR 301
89.5
79.5
69.5
89.0
0
0
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: 100,000 approx.;
PolyoxTM N 10)
0
10
20
0
0
0
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 2,000,000;
PolyoxTMN-60K))
0
0
0
0
0
89.5
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
(PolyoxTM WSR 301
0
0
0
0
89.5
0
hydroxytoluene to which a butylated group has been introduced (BHT)
0
0
0
0.5
0
0
magnesium stearate
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
Total
100
100
100
100
100
100
Blend volume (g)
125
125
125
125
157.5
155.5
Total blend volume (g)
(manufactured quantity)
250
250
250
250
157.5
155.5
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
(1) Oxycodone hydrochloride, polyethylene oxide (and butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT) when needed) were mixed by drying in a Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade low/high shear mixer for 30 seconds.
(2) Magnesium stearate was added to the step 1 mixture and mixed for an additional 30 seconds.
(3) The Step 2 combination was compressed to the target weight using a Manesty F3 tablet press using standard round tooling (0.6746 cm) concave.
(4) Step 3 tablets were loaded into a 37.5 cm coating pan (LCDS Vector Laboratory Development Coating System) at 38 rpm equipped with a single baffle. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) is placed inside the coating pan near the tablet layer to monitor the layer temperature. The layer of tablets was heated to a temperature ranging from about 70 to about 80°C (the temperature can be obtained from tablets 4-1 to 4-6 for each example) for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 2 hours. After that, the disk was cooled and vacuumed.
Tests were performed in the laboratory including tamper resistant testing (breaking strength test and hammer test) as follows:
Treated and untreated tablets were tested at 0.5, 1, and 2 hours of in vitro curing using a USP Type 2 device (paddle) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes at 37°C, using a Perkin Elmer UV spectrophotometer. /VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 220 nM. Tablet dimensions and dissolution results corresponding to the corresponding curing time and temperature are shown in Tables 4-1 to 4-6.
As an additional test for tamper resistance, the treated and untreated discs were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate breakage resistance.
The results were also presented in Tables 4-1 to 4-6.
In addition, the tablets were flattened with a hammer using 10 hand strokes of the hammer to detect physical tampering (hammer test).
Table No. 4-1
Example No. 4-1
Untreated
(n = 10)
Processing time (hours) (n = 5)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
108
109
108
107
107
Thickness (mm)
3.64
3.93
3.94
3.90
3.83
Diameter(mm)
6.74
6.62
6.57
6.55
6.52
Breaking strength (Newton)
94
196+2
196+2
196+2
196+2
Diameter(mm)
After breaking resistance test
(measured immediately after testing)
1 was crushed
5.15
5.38
5.23
5.44
Processing process
Disk layer temperature m
(temperature sensor inside the bowl)
0 minute
19.7
-
-
-
10 minute
-
66.2
-
-
-
20 minute
-
68.6
-
-
-
30 minute
-
73.5
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
76.9
-
-
60 minute
-
-
78.9
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
79.8
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
80.2
n=
3
3
2
2
2
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
0.5 hours
19
21
18
18
19
1 hour
30
32
30
29
31
2 hour
47
49
46
46
50
4 hour
71
76
70
69
75
8 hour
93
96
91
89
93
12 hour
99
99
96
93
96
n=
After hammer test 3 (10 hand strikes with the hammer)
Thickness (mm)
n/a
1.70
2.18
2.37
2.09
2.31
2.06
2.26
2.39
2.66
2.28
1 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
2 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
3 The tablets were flattened when 10 hammer blows were applied to the tablets, but they did not break. The hammer strike caused some cracks in the edge.
Example No. 4-2
Untreated (n = 10)
Processing time (hours) (n = 5)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
108
109
109
109
107
Thickness (mm)
3.65
3.90
3.92
3.87
3.74
Diameter(mm)
6.74
6.61
6.54
6.52
6.46
Breaking strength (Newton)
93
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
Diameter(mm)
After fracture strength test (measured immediately after testing)
Mashed 2
5.40
5.37
5.36
5.61
Diameter during relaxation(mm)
After the fracture resistance test (relaxation period not exceeding 15 minutes)
-
5.60
5.52
5.48
5.73
Processing process
Disk layer temperature m
(temperature sensor inside the bowl)
0 minute
20.2
-
-
-
10 minute
-
71.6
-
-
-
20 minute
-
74.9
-
-
-
30 minute
-
76.1
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
79.8
-
-
60 minute
-
-
80.2
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
76.4
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
77.5
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
20
20
-
29
1 hour
-
30
31
-
44
2 hour
-
47
47
-
66
4 hour
-
70
70
-
90
8 hour
-
89
91
-
95
12 hour
-
92
94
-
94
n=
After hammer test (10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
n/a
1.98
2.00
1.80
1.62
1.96
1.76
2.06
1.95
1.99
1.79
1.98
1.53
2 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
3 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
Example No. 4-3
Untreated (n = 10)
Processing time (hours) (n = 5)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
108
107
108
108
107
Thickness (mm)
3.63
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.72
Diameter(mm)
6.74
6.61
6.55
6.48
6.46
Breaking strength (Newton)
91
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
Diameter(mm)
After fracture strength test (measured immediately after testing)
It was crushed 2
5.58
5.60
5.56
5.72
Diameter during relaxation(mm)
After fracture resistance test (unfolding time not exceeding 15 minutes)
-
5.77
5.75
5.68
5.82
Processing process
Disk layer temperature m
(temperature sensor inside the bowl)
0 minute
20.3
-
-
-
10 minute
-
71.0
-
-
-
20 minute
-
74.1
-
-
-
30 minute
-
75.9
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
76.5
-
-
60 minute
-
-
77.8
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
76.0
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
80.2
n=
3
3
2
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
0.5 hours
-
22
23
-
33
1 hour
-
32
35
-
52
2 hour
-
49
54
-
76
4 hour
-
70
80
-
93
8 hour
-
94
95
-
96
12 hour
-
96
96
-
96
n=
After hammer test (10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
n/a
2.16
1.95
1.43
1.53
1.96
1.85
1.67
1.66
1.91
2.03
1.65
2.08
2 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
3 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
Example No. 4-4
Untreated (n = 10)
Processing time (hours) (n = 5)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
101
101
101
101
101
Thickness (mm)
3.49
3.75
3.71
3.69
3.70
Diameter(mm)
6.75
6.59
6.55
6.55
6.52
Breaking strength (Newton)
81
96 + 3
96 + 3
96 + 3
96 + 3
Diameter(mm)
After the fracture strength test (measured immediately after the test
It was crushed 2
5.39
5.39
5.39
5.47
Flat diameter(mm)
After fracture resistance test (unfolding time not exceeding 15 minutes)
-
5.58
5.59
5.58
5.63
Processing process
Disk layer temperature m
(temperature sensor inside the bowl)
0 minute
37.3
5 minute
-
67.0
-
-
-
10 minute
-
71.8
-
-
-
20 minute
-
74.6
-
-
-
30 minute
-
76.2
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
77.0
-
-
60 minute
-
-
78.7
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
80.3
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
79.3
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
17
16
-
-
1 hour
-
26
25
-
-
2 hour
-
41
40
-
-
4 hour
-
63
59
-
-
8 hour
-
79
75
-
-
12 hour
-
82
80
-
-
n=
After hammer test (10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
-
2.11
2.42
2.14
2.18
2.29
2.25
2.28
2.09
2.32
2.13
2.07
2.36
2 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
3 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
Example No. 4-5
Untreated (n = 10)
Processing time (hours) (n = 5)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
108
108
107
107
107
Thickness (mm)
3.61
3.87
3.84
3.84
3.84
Diameter(mm)
6.74
6.69
6.63
6.61
6.59
Breaking strength (Newton)
116
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
196 +3
Diameter (mm) after fracture strength test (measured immediately after the test
It was crushed 2
5.49
5.59
5.51
5.54
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test (unfolding time no more than 15 minutes)
-
5.67
5.76
5.67
5.68
Processing process
Disc layer temperature m (temperature probe inside the pan)
0 minute
19.8
5 minute
-
56.8
-
-
-
10 minute
-
70.0
-
-
-
20 minute
-
74.6
-
-
-
30 minute
-
76.2
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
77.0
-
-
60 minute
-
-
78.2
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
80.2
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
80.3
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
21
20
-
-
1 hour
-
33
32
-
-
2 hour
-
51
51
-
-
4 hour
-
75
76
-
-
8 hour
-
96
96
-
-
12 hour
-
100
100
-
-
n=
After hammer test (10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
-
2.19
2.31
2.36
2.45
2.15
2.48
2.42
2.08
2.10
2.28
2.19
2.28
2 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
3 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
Example No. 4-6
Processing time (n = 5)
not
Treated (n = 6)
10 minute
20 minute
0.5 hours
1.0 hours
1.5 hours
2.0 hours
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
110
108
108
109
108
109
109
Thickness (mm)
3.65
3.93
3.89
3.89
3.87
3.85
3.85
Diameter(mm)
6.73
6.71
6.63
6.61
6.57
6.55
6.53
Breaking strength (Newton)
128
196 + 2
Diameter(mm)
After the fracture strength test (measured immediately after the test
1 was crushed
5.27
5.47
5.51
5.51
5.56
5.63
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test
(Diastasis period not exceeding 15 minutes)
-
5.48
5.60
5.67
5.66
5.69
5.76
Processing process
Disk layer temperature m
(temperature sensor inside the bowl)
0 minute
30.8
5 minute
-
70.5
-
-
-
-
-
10 minute
-
79.5
-
-
-
-
-
20 minute
-
-
79.9
-
-
-
-
30 minute
-
-
-
79.6
-
-
-
40 minute
-
-
-
-
80.0
-
-
60 minute
-
-
-
-
79.8
-
-
90 minute
-
-
-
-
-
80.2
-
120 minute
-
-
-
-
-
-
80.4
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
-
-
19
20
-
-
1 hour
-
-
-
30
30
-
-
2 hour
-
-
-
48
51
-
-
4 hour
-
-
-
73
78
-
-
8 hour
-
-
-
99
99
-
-
12 hour
-
-
-
99
102
-
-
n=
After hammer test 3
(10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
-
1.46
2.18
2.45
2.23
2.38
2.42
1.19
2.20
2.34
2.39
2.26
2.40
1.24
2.18
2.03
2.52
2.50
2.16
1 The tablets were crushed and fragmented during the breaking strength test.
2 196+ means that the tablets do not break when exposed to a maximum force of 196.
3 The tablets were flattened, but not broken. The hammer strike caused some cracks in the edge.
In Example 5 three other tablets containing 10% (by weight) of oxycodone hydrochloride are prepared.
Composition:
Example No. 5-1
Example No. 5-2
Example No. 5-3
schedule
mg/unit
(٪)
mg/unit (%)
mg/unit
(٪)
oxycodone hydrochloride
12
(10)
20
(10)
12
(10)
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR 301)
106.8
(89)
178
(89)
82.8
(69)
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: approx. 100,000; PolyoxTM N 10)
0
0
24
(20)
magnesium stearate
1.2
(1)
2.0
(1)
1.2
(1)
Total
120
200
120
Total batch size (kg)
(manufactured quantity)
100
100
100
Encapsulation layer
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry white film coating concentration formula, Y-5-18024-A
3.6
(3)
6.0
(3)
3.
(3)
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
The polyethylene oxide was passed through a screen sweco sieve equipped with an 841 micron mesh into separate appropriate containers.
The Gemco “V” mixer (with I-bar) 0.107 cc is filled in the following order:
About half of that is polyethylene oxide WSR 301
oxycodone hydrochloride /
polyethylene oxide N10 (only example 5-3)
Residual polyethylene oxide WSR 301
Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes (Example 5-1) or 20 minutes (Example 5-2) and 15 minutes (Example 5-3) with the I-rod running.
Magnesium stearate was fed to the Gemco V mixer.
Step 4 materials were mixed for 3 minutes with the I-rod off.
The Step 5 mixture was introduced into clean stainless steel equivalent weight containers.
The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at 135,000 tablets per hour using a 22.9/81.3 cm standard round concave tooling.
The tablets from step 7 were loaded into a 121.9 cm Accela-Coat packaging hopper at 7 rpm with a hopper load of 98.6 kg (Example 5-1), 92.2 kg (Example 5-2), 96.9 kg (Example 5-3). ), the disc layer was heated using the exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of approximately 80°C (Example No. 5-2 and Example No. 5-3) and 75°C, and was cured for an hour at the target inlet temperature.
The bowl speed was maintained at between 7 and 10 revolutions per minute, and the tablet bed was cooled using the exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of 25°C until the bed temperature was between 30 and 34°C.
The disc layer was heated using an exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was started as soon as the exit temperature approached 39°C, and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
After the coating process was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm, the exhaust temperature was set to 27°C, the air flow was maintained at the current setting, and the system was cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27 to 30°C.
The disks have been emptied.
Laboratory tests have been performed including tamper resistant (breaking strength test and hammer test) and resistant alcohol extraction as follows:
Cured tablets at 0.5 h, tablets cured at 1.0 h and coated tablets were tested in vitro using a USP type 2 device (paddle) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes at 37°C, using a spectrophotometer Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453, UV at 220 nM. Tablet dimensions and corresponding dissolution results for curing time, temperature, and analogues are shown in Tables 5-1 to 5-3.
Cured tablets at 1.0 hours and coated tablets were tested in vitro with 40% ethanol/SGF medium to evaluate alcohol extractability. Testing was performed using a USP Type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, using an Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453, UV Violet at 220 nM. The dissolution results are shown in Table 5-3.
As an additional tamper resistance test, the cured and uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 439 Newtons using a Schleuniger Model 6 tamper resistance test. The results were presented in Tables 5-1 to 5-3.
In addition, the tablets were flattened using a hammer by applying 10 hand strikes with the hammer to detect physical tampering (hammer test).
Table No. 5-1
Example No. 5-1
Untreated
30 Minute processing
(n = 10)
1 Processing hour/envelope
(n = 10)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
119.7 1
120
122
Thickness (mm)
3.63 2
3.91
3.88
Diameter(mm)
-
7.03
7.02
Breaking strength (Newton)
54 3
439 4
438 4
Diameter(mm)
After breaking resistance test
-
4.18
4.26
Processing process
Inlet temperature m
10 minute
-
75.8
75.8
20 minute
-
75.1
75.1
30 minute
-
76.0
76.0
40 minute
-
-
74.5
50 minute
-
-
73.5
60 minute
-
-
75.6
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
19
19
1 hour
-
31
33
2 hour
-
47
50
4 hour
-
71
76
8 hour
-
93
97
12 hour
-
99
102
Hammer test
(10 hand strikes with hammer)
Measured disc thickness (mm) before and after testing (n = 3)
-
before
after
before
after
3.90
1.77
3.87
2.09
1 Fourteen current samples (40 tablets per sample) were taken, and the average of each sample was taken. The reported value is the average of the averages.
2n=39
3 n=130
4n = 10; The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.
Table No. 5-2
Example No. 5-2
Untreated
30 Minute processing
(n = 10)
1 Processing hour/envelope
(n = 10)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
200.4 1
201
206
Thickness (mm)
5.50 2
5.92
5.86
Diameter(mm)
-
7.03
7.01
Breaking strength (Newton)
85 3
439 4
439 4
Diameter(mm)
After breaking resistance
-
5.52
5.72
Processing process
Inlet temperature m
10 minute
-
79.7
79.7
20 minute
-
80.3
80.3
30 minute
-
79.3
79.3
40 minute
-
-
79.5
50 minute
-
-
80.9
60 minute
-
-
81.0
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
14
15
1 hour
-
23
24
2 hour
-
36
38
4 hour
-
57
60
8 hour
-
83
85
12 hour
-
94
95
Hammer test
(10 hand strikes with hammer)
Measured disc thickness (mm) before and after testing (n = 3)
-
before
after
before
after
5.92
2.97
5.91
2.84
1 Nine current samples were taken (40 tablets per sample), and the average of each sample was taken. The reported value is the average of the averages.
2n = 27
3 n=90
4n = 10; The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.
Example No. 5-3
Untreated
30 Minute processing
(n = 10)
1 Processing hour/envelope
(n = 10)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
120.5 1
122
125
Thickness (mm)
3.64 2
3.85
3.77
Diameter(mm)
-
7.03
7.01
Breaking strength (Newton)
56 3
438 4
439 4
Diameter(mm)
After breaking resistance
-
3.96
4.28
Processing process
Inlet temperature m
10 minute
-
80.0
80.0
20 minute
-
82.3
82.3
30 minute
-
78.9
78.9
40 minute
-
-
79.5
50 minute
-
-
79.5
60 minute
-
-
80.7
SGF
SGF
40% ethanol
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
-
20
23
21
1 hour
-
31
37
31
2 hour
-
50
58
50
4 hour
-
76
86
76
8 hour
-
95
100
99
12 hour
-
98
100
104
Hammer test
(10 hand strikes with hammer)
Measured disc thickness (mm) before and after testing (n = 3)
-
pre
post. post
pre
post. post
3.81
1.63
3.79
1.62
1 Twelve current samples were taken (40 tablets per sample), and the average of each sample was taken. The reported value is the average of the averages. And 2n = 33
3 n=130
4n = 10; The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.
In Example 6, tablets containing Naltrexone HCl are prepared.
Composition:
disk
mg/unit
Naltrexone HCl
10
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR301)
89.0
magnesium stearate
1.0
Total
100
Total batch size (kg)
(manufactured quantity)
20
mg/unit
Basal layer
Opadry Red film coating concentration formula, Y-5-1-15139
3.0
Special effects
epimembrane
Opadry FX Silver formula 62W28547
3.0
The tablets have been prepared
Example No. 7
Three additional examples involving 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride were prepared and tested.
Composition:
Example No. 7-1
Example No. 7-2
Example No. 7-3
schedule
mg/unit (%)
mg/unit (%)
mg/unit (%)
oxycodone hydrochloride
10 (5)
10 (6.67)
10 (10)
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 4,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR 301)
188 (94)
138.5 (92.3)
69 (69)
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: 100,000 approx.;
PolyoxTM N 01)
0
0
20 (20)
magnesium stearate
2 (1)
1.5 (1)
1 (1)
Total
200
150
100
Total batch size (kg)
(manufactured quantity)
100
100
100
Film coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
The formula for the concentration of Opadry white film coating is Y-5-18024-A
6
4.5
3
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco screen sieve equipped with an 841 micron mesh into separate appropriate containers.
The Gemco "V" mixer (with I-shaft) 0.283 m³ is filled in the following order:
About half of that is polyethylene oxide WSR 301
oxycodone hydrochloride /polyethylene oxide N10 (only Example 5-3)
Residual polyethylene oxide WSR 301
Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the I-rod running.
Magnesium stearate was fed to the Gemco V mixer.
Step 4 materials were mixed for 3 minutes with the I-rod off.
The Step 5 mixture was introduced into clean stainless steel equivalent weight containers.
The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at 135,000 tablets per hour using a 12.9/81.3 cm standard round concave tooling (Example 7-3).
The tablets from Step 7 were loaded into a 42-inch Accela-Coat packaging vessel at a vessel load of 97.388 kg (Example 7-1), 91.051 kg (Example 7-2), and 89.527 kg (Example 7-3).
The bowl speed was set to 7 rpm, and the tablet bed was heated by setting exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of about 75°C. The tablets were processed at the target inlet temperature for 1 hour (Example 7-1 and Example 7-2) and 30 minutes (Example 7-3).
The bowl speed was maintained between 7 and 8 rpm, and the tablet bed was cooled using the exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of 25°C until the bed temperature was achieved between 30 and 34°C.
The disc layer was heated using an exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was started as soon as the exit temperature approached 39°C, and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
After the coating process was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm, the exhaust temperature was set to 27°C, the air flow was maintained at the current setting, and the system was cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27 to 30°C.
The disks have been emptied.
Tests have been performed in the laboratory including tamper resistant (breaking strength test, hammer test, flattened tablets), resistant alcohol extraction, and stability tests as follows:
Cured coated tablets (intact and flat) were tested in vitro using a USP Type 2 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed using high performance reverse-phase liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC 18 with dimensions of 3.0 150 mm, 3 µm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a non-basic potassium phosphate buffer solution ( pH 3), UV detector at 230 nM. Sample time points included 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 hours. Additional sample time points included 1.0, 4.0, and 12 hours.
The coated (intact and flat) treated tablets were tested in vitro using ethanol/SGF medium containing 0% and 40% ethanol to evaluate alcohol extractability. The test was performed using a USP type 1 device (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C.
Samples were analyzed using high performance reverse-phase liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC 18 with a dimension of 3.0 150 mm, 3 µm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a nonbasic potassium phosphate buffer solution (No. pH 3), UV detector at 230 nM. Sample time points included 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0 hours.
The treated discs were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a maximum force of 439 Newtons using a Schleuniger Model 6 device to evaluate the resistance to breakage.
The treated tablets were subjected to high pressure using a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model #3912) to detect physical tampering of flattening of tablets. The treated discs were subjected to an additional fracture resistance test by applying 10 hand strikes of a hammer to detect tamper resistant.
The treated, coated tablets were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C/75% relative humidity) for a specified period of time, and sequentially testing the tablets in the laboratory as described above. Storage time points include the initial sample (i.e. before storage), one month, two months, three months, and six months of storage. Sample time points for the dissolution test include 1.0, 4.0, and 12.0 hours.
The treated, coated tablets were subjected to an additional stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C/75% relative humidity) for a specified period of time, and sequentially subjecting the tablets to an assay test to determine the oxycodone content. Hydrochloride in tablet samples in percentage relative to that declared on the label. Sample time points in relation to storage include the initial sample (i.e. before storage), one month, two months, three months, and six months of storage. In the assay test, oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two batches of ten tablets each using 900 ml of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without SGF enzymes under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000 ml volumetric flask until the tablets were completely dispersed or all night long. Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed using reversed-phase HPLC with a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 µm column, held at 60°C using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and a buffer solution with monobasic potassium phosphate at pH. 3 with a UV detector at 280 nm.
The coated cured tablets were subjected to an additional stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C/75% relative humidity) for a specified period of time, and sequentially subjecting the tablets to the oxycodone-N-test. oxide (ONO) to determine the percentage content of the breakdown product oxycodone-N-oxide relative to that declared on the oxycodone hydrochloride label. Sample time points in relation to storage include the initial sample (i.e. before storage), one month, two months, three months, and six months of storage. In the ONO test, oxycodone hydrochloride and its degradation products were extracted from a batch of ten tablets using 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid (SGF) enzymes under constant magnetic stirring in a beaker. Volume 1000 ml until the tablets are completely dispersed or overnight. Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed using reversed-phase HPLC with a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 µm column, held at 60°C using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and a buffer solution with monobasic potassium phosphate at pH 3. With a UV detector at 206 nm.
The results are presented in Tables 7-1 to 7-3.
Table No. (7-1-1)
Example No. 7-1
Intact (n=10)
Flat (n=3)
(shed 6803.89 kg)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
205
207
204
Thickness (mm)
5.95
1.01 1
0.96 1
% fish
17.0
16.1
Diameter(mm)
7.02
17.13 2
17.35 2
Breaking strength (Newton)
≤438 3
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test
5.84
Hammer test
before and after
Measured disc thickness(mm)
before
after
6.04
2.96
5.95
3.10
6.03
3.32
Salim
Salim
flat
flat
SGF
40% EtOH
SGF
40% EtOH
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
11
9
17
13
0.75 hours
15
12
23
18
1.0 hours
20
16
28
21
1.5 hours
27
21
36
29
2.0 hours
34
27
44
35
Salim
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=6)
0.5 hours
-
1 hour
22
2 hour
-
4 hour
57
8 hour
-
12 hour
97
1 3 measurements per disc.
2 Two measurements per disc
3 The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438 Newtons.
Table No. 7-1-2
Stability tests, Example No. 7-1
Storage conditions (m/RH%) and storage time1
Initial
Month
40/75
Two months
40/75
3 Months
25/60
3 Months
40/75
Solubility(released%)
(n=6)
SGF
1 hour
22
21
21
20
21
4 hour
57
57
58
56
58
12 hour
97
98
98
97
97
Assay test
%oxycodonehydrochloride2
Assay 1
96.6
96.2
97.3
97.1
95.0
Assay 2
95.3
97.2
95.7
98.7
96.0
Average
96.0
96.7
96.5
97.9
95.5
ONO test
(oxycodone N-oxide%)2
0.02
0.06
0.06
0.04
0.05
1 [month(s)]; 2 As advertised on the oxycodone hydrochloride label.
Table No. 7-2-1
Example No. 7-2
Intact (n = 10)
flat (n=3)
(9071.80 kg shed)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
154
154
153
Thickness (mm)
4.68
0.75 1
0.77 1
% fish
16.0
16.5
Diameter(mm)
7.02
17.14 2
16.90 2
Breaking strength (Newton)
438 3
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test
4.93
Hammer test
before and after
Measured disc thickness(mm)
before
after
4.73
2.65
4.64
2.95
4.67
2.60
Salim
Salim
flat
flat
SGF
40% EtOH
SGF
40% EtOH
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
14
10
21
15
0.75 hours
19
14
27
20
1.0 hours
24
17
33
26
1.5 hours
33
23
44
36
2.0 hours
40
29
53
43
Salim
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=6)
0.5 hours
-
1 hour
26
2 hour
-
4 hour
67
8 hour
-
12 hour
98
1 3 measurements per disc.
2 Two measurements per disc
3 The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438 Newtons.
Table No. 7-2-2
Stability test, Example 7-2
Initial
Month
40/75
Two months
40/75
3 Months
25/60
3 Months
40/75
6 Months
25/60
6 Months
40/75
Solubility(released%)
(n = 6) SGF
1 hour
26
24
22
23
24
25
25
4 hour
67
66
61
65
64
64
69
12 hour
98
101
97
98
99
99
97
Assay test
(% oxycodone hydrochloride)2
Assay 1
97.1
97.7
96.4
98.4
97.3
96.3
94.1
Assay 2
96.6
96.6
96.2
98.0
96.9
96.3
94.2
Average
96.9
97.1
96.3
98.2
97.1
96.3
94.2
ONO test
(oxycodone N-oxide%)2
0.02
0.08
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.06
0.26
1 [month(s)]; 2 As advertised on the oxycodone hydrochloride label.
Table No. 7-3-1
Example No. 7-3
Intact (n = 10)
flat (n=3)
(shed 6803.89 kg)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
103
102
104
Thickness (mm)
3.92
0.611
(15.6)
0.661
(16.8)
Diameter(mm)
6.25
15.36
15.24
Breaking strength (Newton)
439 3
Diameter (mm) after fracture resistance test
3.80
Hammer test
before and after
Measured disc thickness(mm)
before
after
3.90
1.66
3.89
1.97
3.91
1.56
Salim
Salim
flat
flat
SGF
40% EtOH
SGF
40% EtOH
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=3)
0.5 hours
19
15
26
19
0.75 hours
25
20
34
25
1.0 hours
30
25
40
31
1.5 hours
41
33
51
41
2.0 hours
50
41
60
50
Salim
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
(n=6)
0.5 hours
1 hour
32
2 hour
-
4 hour
83
8 hour
-
12 hour
101
1 3 measurements per disc.
2 Two measurements per disc
3 The discs did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 439 Newtons.
Table No. 7-3-2
Stability tests, Example 7-3
Storage conditions (m/RH%) and storage time1
Initial
Month
40/75
Two months
40/75
3 Months
25/60
Solubility(released%)
(n=6)
SGF
1 hour
32
29
30
31
4 hour
83
76
77
78
12 hour
101
103
102
103
Assay test
(% oxycodone hydrochloride)2
Assay 1
99.4
99.4
97.3
101.0
Assay 2
98.8
98.9
100.0
101.0
Average
99.1
99.1
98.6
101.0
ONO test
(oxycodone N-oxide%)2
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.02
1 [month(s)]; 2 As advertised on the oxycodone hydrochloride label.
Example No. 8
Two other tablets containing 160 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride have been manufactured (Examples 8-1 and Example 8-2).
Composition:
Example No. 8-1
Example No. 8-2
Component
mg/unit
٪
mg/unit
٪
Oxycodone Hydrochloride
160
25
160
25
polyethylene oxide
(high molecular weight, class 301)
476.8
74.5
284.8
44.5
polyethylene oxide
(low molecular weight, class N10)
0
0
192
30
magnesium stearate
3.2
0.5
3.2
0.5
Total
640
100
640
100
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
(1) Oxycodone hydrochloride and polyethylene oxide were mixed by drying in a 1.5 cup Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade low/high shear blender for 30 seconds.
(2) Add magnesium stearate, and mix with step 1 mixture for an additional 30 seconds.
(3) Step 2 combination was compressed to the target weight using a Manesty F3 single-pass tablet press using a capsule-shaped tool (7.937 x 14.290 mm).
(3) The tablets from step 2 were spread on a tray, and placed in a Hotpack oven model 435304 at 73°C for 3 hours to cure the tablets.
Laboratory tests have been performed including tamper resistant testing (breaking strength test) as follows:
Tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Type 2 (basket) device at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, using an Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453. UV wavelength at 220 nm after curing for 3 hours. Dimensions of treated and untreated tablets and dissolution results are shown in Table 8.
As an additional test for tamper resistance, the cured and uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 meter. The results are presented in Table 8.
In addition, the tablets were flattened using a hammer by applying 10 hand strikes with the hammer to detect physical tampering (hammer test).
Table No. 8
Example 8.1
Example 8.2
Untreated
(n=12)
3 Processing hour
(n=5)
Untreated
(n=12)
3 Processing hour
(n = 10)
Disc dimensions
Weight(mg)
648
648
643
643
Thickness (mm)
7.07
7.42
7.01
7.20
Width (mm)
7.96
7.97
7.96
7.91
Breaking strength (Newton)
196 +
(n=2)
196 +
(n=1)
196 +
(n=2)
196 +
(n=2)
Dissolution
(which was launched%)
0.5 hours
Not tested
9
Not tested
13
1 hour
15
21
2 hour
23
35
4 hour
38
59
8 hour
60
89
12 hour
76
92
After hammer test
(10 hand strikes with hammer)
Thickness (mm)
It was already broken
-
It was already broken
3.80
1 The hardness tester reached its maximum at 20+ kilo-pounds equivalent to 196+ Newtons (1 kilo-pound = 9.807 Newtons), and the tablets did not fracture when subjected to a maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Example No. 9:
Three tablets each containing 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride were manufactured and tested. For installations:
Example No. 9-1
Example No. 9-2
Example No. 9-3
disk
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
Hydromorphone hydrochloride
12
12
12
polyethylene oxide
(Molecular weight: about 7,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR 303)
483
681
829.5
magnesium stearate
5
7
8.5
Total
500
700
850
Total batch size (kg)
(manufactured quantity)
100
100
100
Film coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
magnesium stearate
0.100
0.142
0.170
Opadry white film coating concentration product formula, formula Y-5-18024-A
15
21
25.5
Packaging batch size (kg)
80
79
80
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1 - Hydromorphone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter screen equipped with an 841 micron mesh, into appropriate separate vessels.
2 Gemco V mixer (with condensing shaft) 0.283 m3 is filled in the following order:
25 Approximately kg of polyethylene oxide WSR 303 hydromorphone hydrochloride
3- Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
4- The remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 303 was filled into a Gemco V mixer.
5- Step 4 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
6- The magnesium stearate was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
7- The materials of step 6 were mixed for 3 minutes with the condensation column turned off.
8- The Step 7 mixture was filled in clean, tarred, stainless steel containers.
9- The Step 8 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at a speed of 133,000 tablets per hour using 1.75 cm standard round concave tooling.
10. Step 9 tablets were loaded into a 40-inch Accela-Coat packaging container with a load of 80 kg (Examples 9-1 and 9-3) and 79 kg (Example 9-2).
11- The pan speed was set to 2 rpm and the disc layer was heated by adjusting the exhaust air temperature to reach an inlet temperature of about 75°C. The tablets were cured for one hour and 15 minutes at the following inlet temperature ranges, 75-87°C (Example No. 9-1), 75-89°C (Example No. 9-2) and 75-86°C (Example No. 9-3).
12- At the beginning of cooling, the bowl speed was increased to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was cooled using an exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 25°C until the exhaust temperature became between 30 and 34°C. During the cooling process, magnesium stearate is added to the tablet layer to reduce tablets stick.
13- The disc layer was heated using an exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was initiated as soon as the outlet temperature approached 39°C and continued until the target weight gain of % was achieved.
14- After packaging was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27 C, the airflow was kept at the current setting value and the system was cooled to an exhaust temperature between 27 and 30 C.
15- The discs have been removed.
Example No. 10
Another tablet containing 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride has been prepared.
Composition:
Example No. 10
disk
unit/mg
Hydromorphone HCl
12
polyethylene oxide
(MW: approximately 7,000,000
PolyoxTM WSR 303)
483
magnesium stearate
5
Total
500
Total batch size (kg)
Manufactured quantity
119.98
The processing steps used to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- Hydromorphone HC l and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter screen equipped with an 841 micron mesh, in appropriate separate vessels.
2- The Gemco “V” mixer (with condensing shaft) 0.283 m3 was filled in the following order:
60 Approximately kg of polyethylene oxide WSR 303 hydromorphone hydrochloride
3- Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
4- The remaining polyethylene oxideWSR 303 was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
5- Step 4 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
6- The magnesium stearate was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
7- The materials of step 6 were mixed for 3 minutes with the condensation column turned off.
8- The Step 7 mixture was filled in clean, tarred, stainless steel containers.
9- The Step 8 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40 tablet press at 150,000 strokes per minute using 1.27 cm standard round concave tooling.
10- Step 9 tablets were loaded into a 18.90 cm Accela-Coat container with a load of 92.887 kg.
11- The pan speed was set to 1.9 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by adjusting the exhaust air temperature to reach an inlet temperature of about 80°C. The tablets were cured for two hours at the next entry temperature range, 75-87°C.
12- At the end of treatment and the beginning of cooling, the layer of tablets began to agglomerate (by tablets sticking together). The bowl speed was increased to 2.8 rpm, but the tablet layer was completely agglomerated and was no longer recoverable for encapsulation.
It is assumed that clumping of tablets can be avoided, for example by reducing the processing temperature, increasing the pan speed, using magnesium stearate as an anti-tacking agent, or applying an undercoating before processing.
However some tablets were taken as a sample before cooling for testing in the laboratory which was carried out as follows:
Cured tablets tested in vitro using a USP Type 2 (paddle) device at 75 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C using a waters alliance system equipped with a column Waters Novapak C18 3.9mm 150mm using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile, SDS, and basic buffer solution of sodium phosphate monohydrate (pH 2.9). Detection was done using PDA reagent. Sample time points include time points 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 18, and 22 hours.
Table No. 10
USP Type 2 device
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
1 hour
19
2 hour
30
4 hours
48
8 hours
77
12 hour
95
18 hour
103
22 hour
104
Example No. 11
Another tablet containing 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride has been prepared.
Composition:
disk
mg/unit
Hydromorphone HCl
12
polyethylene oxide
(MW: approximately 7,000,000;
PolyoxTM WSR 303)
681
magnesium stearate
7
Total
700
Total batch size (kg)
(manufactured quantity)
122.53
Membrane packaging
mg/unit
Opadry White Concentrated Cling Film Formula Y-5-18024-A
21
Packaging batch size (kg)
80
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1 - Hydromorphone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter screen equipped with an 841 micron mesh, into appropriate separate vessels.
2 Gemco V mixer (with condensing shaft) 0.283 m3 is filled in the following order:
60 Approximately kg of polyethylene oxide WSR 303 hydromorphone hydrochloride
3- The remaining polyethylene oxideWSR 303 was filled into a Gemco V mixer.
4- The materials of step 4 were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
5- The magnesium stearate was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
6- Step 5 materials were mixed for 3 minutes with the condensation column turned off.
7- The Step 6 mixture was filled in clean, tarred, stainless steel containers.
8- The Step 7 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at a speed of 150,000 tablets per hour using 1.27 cm standard round concave tools.
9- Step 8 tablets were loaded into a 121.9 cm Accela-Coat packaging container with a load of 80,000 kg.
10- The pan speed was set to 1.8 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by adjusting the exhaust air temperature to reach an inlet temperature of about 80°C. The tablets were cured for 1.25 hours at the following inlet temperature range, 75-87°C.
11- At the end of treatment and the beginning of cooling, the tablet layer began to clump (tablets stick together). The bowl speed was increased to 10 rpm, and the tablets were separated.
12- The bowl speed was continued at approximately 10 revolutions per minute and the disc layer was cooled using an exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 25°C until the exhaust temperature ranged between 30 and 34°C.
13- The tablet bed was heated using exhaust air temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was initiated as soon as the outlet temperature approached 39°C and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
14- After packaging was completed, the bowl speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27 C, the airflow was kept at the current setting value and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature between 27 and 30 C.
15- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory as follows:
Table No. 11
USP Type 2 device
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(mean n = 6)
1 hour
12
2 hour
19
4 hours
29
8 hours
46
12 hour
60
18 hour
76
22 hour
84
24 hour
88
Example No. 12
In two other examples, 10 mg oxycodone hydrochloride was manufactured with tablet inserts as shown in Example 2-3 and coated with polyethylene oxide to achieve delayed release.
Composition: Inner part of the disc
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
10
polyethylene oxide
(MW: approximately 4,000,000
(PolyoxTM WSR301)
85
Hydroxypropyl Cellulose
(KlucelTM HXF)
5
The total internal parts of the disks
100
Composition: Pressure coating over the inside of the disc
Example 12.1
Example 12.2
Component
mg/unit
mg/unit
polyethylene oxide
(MW: approximately 4,000,000
(PolyoxTM WSR301)
200
100
Internal parts of disks
100
100
Total weight of tablets
300
200
Manufacturing process:
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1 - The disk from Example 2-3 was used as an internal part of the disk.
2 The 1-tablet press Manesty Type F 3 tablet press is equipped with 0.3125cm standard round concave tools.
3- For Example 12-1, approximately 100 mg of polyethylene oxide was placed in the die, the inner part of the tablet was manually placed in the center of the die (above the powder bed), and another 100 mg was placed on top of the tablet in the die.
4- The materials were manually compressed by managing the pressure frame.
5- For Example 12-2, approximately 50 mg of polyethylene oxide was placed in the mold, the inside of the tablet was manually placed in the center of the mold (above the powder layer), and another 50 mg was placed on top of the tablet in the mold.
6- The materials were manually compressed by managing the pressure frame.
7- The tablets of steps 4 and 6 were placed on a plate placed in a Hotpack oven model 435304 to reach a temperature of 75 ° C for 3 hours in order for the cure compression coated tablets to be cured.
The test was performed in the laboratory as follows:
The tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, using:
Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20 USP Apparatus, UV detection at 220 nm. Table No. 12 shows the dimensions of compression coated tablets and their melting results.
Table No. 12
Example 12.1
Example 12.2
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
304
312
209
210
Thickness (mm)
5.62
5.73
5.24
5.29
Diameter(mm)
9.10
9.10
7.61
7.54
Dissolution
(what is released%)
(n=2)
0.5 hours
0
1 hour
0
15
2 hour
47
4 hours
9
95
8 hours
82
96
12 hour
97
96
Installations:
Example No. 13-1
Example No. 13-2
Example No. 13-3
Example No. 13-4
Example No. 13-5
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
HCl oxycodone
10
15
20
30
40
polyethylene oxide
(MW: approximately 4,000,000
(PolyoxTM WSR301)
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5
magnesium stearate
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Total weight of internal parts of tablets (mg)
150
150
150
150
150
Total batch size
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
6
6
6
6
6
Total weight of tablet (mg)
156
156
156
156
156
Packaging batch size (kg)
8.754
9.447
9.403
8.717
8.902
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The 16 quart Patterson Kelly V mixer (with condensing shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 of polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 5 minutes with the condensation column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer.
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the condensation column turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag.
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-station tablet press at a speed of 35,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools.
7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 24-inch Compu-Lab coating pan with a load of 8.754 kg (Example 13-1), 9.447 kg (Example 13-2), 9.403 kg (Example 13-3), and 8.717 kg. (Example No. 13-4), 8.902 kg (Example No. 13-5).
8- A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed in the bowl directly above the layer of discs so that the probe tip was near the layer of moving discs.
9- The pan speed set was set to 7 rpm and the tablet layer was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to reach a target probe temperature of 75°C. The curing starting point (as described in Method 4) was initiated as soon as the temperature probe indicated approximately 70°C (Example 13-1 at 68.3°C, Example 13-2 at 69.9°C, Example 13-1 at 68.3°C, Example 13-2 at 69.9°C). No. 13-3 and 13-4 at 70.0 m, and Example No. 13-5 at 71.0 m). Once the target probe temperature was reached, the inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain this target probe temperature. The tablets were processed for 90 minutes. The bowl speed was increased to 12 rpm after approximately 60 minutes of curing (except in Example 13-5, the bowl speed was maintained at 7 rpm throughout curing). Samples were taken after 30 minutes, 60 minutes and 90 minutes of treatment. The temperatures of the curing processes in Examples 13-1 through 13-5 are shown in Tables 13-1-1 through 13-5-1 and Figures 10 through 14.
10- At the end of treatment, magnesium stearate was added to the moving disc layer as an anti-tacking agent. The amount of magnesium stearate added was 8.75 g (Example 13-1), 1.8887 g (Example 13-2), 1.8808 g (Example 13-3), 1.7400 g (Example 13-4), and 1.784 g (Example No. 13-5). The magnesium stearate was weighed in a weighing vessel and applied by spreading the powder onto the bed of moving tablets manually. The bowl speed was maintained at 12 rpm (Example 13-5 at 7 rpm) and the tablet bed was cooled by setting the inlet temperature to 21°C. The tablet layer was cooled to an exhaust temperature < 41°C.
The tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 55°C. Film coating was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached approximately 43°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
12- After completing the film coating, the pan speed was reduced (3 to 6 revolutions per minute) and the inlet temperature was set to between 21 and 25 C to cool the system. The airflow was maintained at the currently set value.
13- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests and density measurement as follows:
30-min, 60-min, and 90-min tablets coated were tested in vitro using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of non-simulated gastric fluid (SGF). ) enzymes at a temperature of 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of non-basic potassium phosphate. (pH 3.0) and UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours. The dimensions of the tablets and their corresponding dissolution results for the curing time and temperature are shown in Tables 13-1-2 to 13-5-2. Uncured tablets, cured tablets, and coated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test imposing a maximum force of 439 Newtons using a Schleuniger Model 6D device to evaluate the resistance of tablets to breaking, or a breaking strength test imposing a maximum force of 196 Newtons using Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus for evaluating breakage resistance.
The densities of untreated tablets and treated tablets for different time periods (samples 30, 60 and 90 minutes) were determined by the Archimedes principle, using a top-loading Mettler Toledo balance model #AB 135-S/FACT serial number #1127430072 and 33360 density determination tools, according for the next procedure
1- Set up the Mettler Toledo balance with density determination tools.
2- Fill a cup of appropriate size (200 ml) with hexane.
3- The weight of the tablet in the air is considered weight A.
4- Transfer the same disk to the lower file of the beaker filled with hexane.
5- Determine the weight of the tablet in hexane and record the weight as weight B.
6- Calculate density according to the equation
<img file="SA2709B1_D0003.tif" />
, where
ρ: density tablet in air
A: The weight of the tablet in air
B: The weight of the tablet when immersed in liquid.
ρ0: density of liquid at a given temperature (density of hexane at 20°C = 0.660 g/ml (Merck Index).
7- Record density.
The density values reported are the average values for three tablets and all refer to uncoated tablets.
The results are shown in the following tables.
Table No. 13-1-1: Processing temperatures in Example No. 13-1
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Set inlet temperature
(M)
Actual inlet temperature
(M)2
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature
(M)4
comments
0
-
27
26، 9
26، 8
25، 7
10
-
75
74، 9
59، 5
56، 8
15
0
85
84، 8
68، 3
65، 5
Beginning of treatment
20
5
85
84، 7
71
68، 4
26
11
85
84، 8
72، 8
70، 1
30
15
85
84، 8
74
70، 9
45
30
83
83
74، 8
74، 7
Sample 30 minutes
55
40
81
81، 2
74، 8
76
61
46
81
81، 2
74، 7
75، 9
65
50
81
81
74، 8
75، 8
70
55
81
81
74، 7
75، 8
75
60
81
81، 1
75
75، 9
60 minute sample
85
70
81
81، 1
74، 6
75، 8
95
80
81
81، 1
74، 8
75، 9
105
90
81
80، 9
74، 9
76
End of processing, sample 90 min
112
-
21
35، 3
49
55، 6
128
-
21
33، 4
32
-
1 Determined according to method 4, 2 the temperature measured at the inlet; 3 the temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple) 4 the temperature measured at the exhaust.
Example 13.1
Untreated
(n=5)
Process for 30 minutes
(n=5)
Treatment for 60 (n = 5)
Cured for 90, laminated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
153
153
152
158
Thickness (mm)
4.63
4.98
4.89
4.89
Diameter(mm)
7.14
7.00
6.98
6.98
Breaking strength (Newton)
80
196 1
196 1
438 2
n=3
n=3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
1 hour
-
25 (9.5)
24 (8.4)
27 (7.3)
2 hour
-
39 (7.7)
39 (8.7)
43 (6.6)
4 hours
-
62 (7.0)
62 (5.8)
67 (6.8)
8 hours
-
89 (4.7)
91 (5.0)
92 (2.9)
12 hour
-
100 (3.3)
100 (3.6)
101 (2.4)
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 13-2-1: Processing temperatures in Example No. 13-5
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Set inlet temperature
(M)
Actual inlet temperature
(M)2
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature
(M)4
comments
0
-
23
22، 7
26، 1
23، 8
5
-
85
81
55، 7
51، 1
10
-
85
85، 1
63، 7
62، 3
21
0
85
84، 8
69، 9
69، 1
Beginning of treatment
31
10
85
85، 1
72، 4
70، 9
41
20
85
85، 1
73، 7
72، 5
51
30
82
82
74، 8
75، 8
61
40
82
81، 9
75
76، 2
Sample 30 minutes
71
50
81
81
74، 8
75، 9
81
60
81
80، 8
75
75، 9
60 minute sample
91
70
81
81
74، 9
76
101
80
80، 5
80، 5
74، 8
75، 8
111
90
80، 5
80، 5
74، 8
75، 7
End of processing, sample 90 min
118
-
21
23، 1
50
55، 1
131
-
21
22، 4
34، 1
37، 7
1 Determined according to method 4, 2Temperature measured at inlet; 3 Temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple) 4 Temperature measured at the exhaust outlet.
Example No. 13-2
Untreated
(n=5)
Process for 30 minutes
(n=5)
60-minute treatment
(n=5)
Curing for 90 minutes, coated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
152
153
152
157
Thickness (mm)
4.69
4.99
4.90
4.84
Diameter(mm)
7.14
6.98
6.95
6.95
Breaking strength (Newton)
62
196 1
196 1
196 1
n=6
n=6
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
1 hour
-
23 (10.6)
22 (8.5)
25 (5.2)
2 hour
-
38 (10.1)
37 (7.7)
41 (4.6)
4 hours
-
64 (9.5)
61 (8.1)
65 (3.6)
8 hours
-
92 (6.8)
90 (4.6)
91 (2.4)
12 hour
-
100 (3.4)
100 (3.2)
99 (2.9)
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 13-3-1: Processing temperatures in Example No. 13-3:
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Set inlet temperature
(M)
Actual inlet temperature
(M)2
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature
(M)4
comments
0
-
25
24، 9
27، 8
26، 2
5
-
90
85
58، 2
53، 9
10
-
90
89، 8
67
65، 1
13
0
90
90، 1
70
68، 3
Beginning of treatment
23
10
90
90
74، 6
72، 2
33
20
86
85، 9
74، 7
73، 4
43
30
83
83، 1
75، 4
76، 5
Sample 30 minutes
53
40
82
82، 1
74، 9
76، 3
63
50
81، 5
81، 8
75
76، 4
73
60
81، 5
81، 5
74، 7
76، 1
60 minute sample
83
70
81، 5
81، 5
75
76، 1
93
80
81، 5
81، 6
75
76، 1
103
90
81، 5
81، 3
75
76، 1
End of processing, sample 90 min
109
-
21
35، 5
50
57، 5
121
-
21
22، 6
33، 8
39، 3
1 Determined according to method 4, 2Temperature measured at inlet; 3 Temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple) 4 Temperature measured at the exhaust outlet.
Table No. 13-3-2
Example No. 13-3
Untreated
(n=5)
Process for 30 minutes
(n=5)
60-minute treatment
(n=5)
Curing for 90 minutes, coated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
154
154
152
160
Thickness (mm)
4.56
4.85
4.79
4.77
Diameter(mm)
7.13
7.01
6.96
6.98
Breaking strength (Newton)
83
196 1
196 1
196 1
n=6
n=6
n=6
Dissolution (what was released)
SGF%
1 hour
-
22 (5.8)
26 (9.2)
23 (5.7)
2 hour
-
37 (6.4)
42 (8.6)
39 (4.7)
4 hours
-
61 (6.3)
67 (6.3)
64 (3.7)
8 hours
-
90 (4.5)
93 (3.3)
92 (2.7)
12 hour
-
99 (3.1)
101 (2.2)
101 (1.8)
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 13-4-1: Processing temperatures in Example No. 13-4:
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Set inlet temperature
(M)
Actual inlet temperature
(M)2
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature
(M)4
comments
0
-
25
25
24,6
23,4
5
-
90
85
46,8
51
10
-
90
89,9
56,6
63,8
15
-
90
89,8
68,5
68,7
16
0
90
90,1
70
69,5
Beginning of treatment
26
10
90
90
73,6
72,9
36
20
86
86
75,4
76,8
46
30
84
84
75,4
77,2
Sample 30 minutes
56
40
83
82,9
75,1
76,8
66
50
82
81,4
74,8
76,6
76
60
82
81,7
74,7
76,3
60 minute sample
86
70
82
82,1
75
76,3
96
80
82
82,1
75,1
76,3
106
90
82
82,1
75,1
76,4
End of processing, sample 90 min
112
-
21
33,8
55,9
50
126
-
21
22,1
31,6
34,6
1 Determined according to method 4, 2Temperature measured at inlet; 3 Temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple) 4 Temperature measured at the exhaust outlet.
Example No. 13-4
Untreated
(n=5)
Process for 30 minutes
(n=5)
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
Curing for 90 minutes, coated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150
151
150
159
Thickness (mm)
4.43
4.73
4.67
4.68
Diameter(mm)
7.13
7.00
6.97
7.00
Breaking strength (Newton)
65
196 1
196 1
196 1
Z
n=6
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
-
29 (3.2)
25 (7.9)
24 (5.5)
Two hours
-
47 (3.1)
42 (6.7)
41 (5.2)
4 hours
-
71 (2.4)
67 (5.2)
67 (6.2)
8 hours
-
92 (2.5)
92 (4.3)
94 (3.2)
12 hour
-
99 (2.1)
100 (2.8)
101 (2.2)
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 13-5-1: Processing temperatures in Example No. 13-5:
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Set inlet temperature
(M)
Actual inlet temperature
(M)2
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature
(M)4
comments
0
-
80
69,2
39,8
35,6
10
-
90
80,2
64,9
65,6
20
0
90
90,2
70,9
71
Beginning of treatment
25
5
90
89,9
71,7
72,4
30
10
90
90,1
72,8
73,4
35
15
85
87,1
74,1
76,1
Sample 30 minutes
50
30
85
85
75,2
77,5
60
40
83
83,2
74,7
76,8
80
60
83
83,1
75,1
76,5
60 minute sample
90
70
83
83
75,3
76,6
100
80
80
79,1
74,4
76
110
90
80
80,1
73,6
74,7
End of processing, sample 90 min
115
-
21
39,6
55,6
59,4
120
-
21
24,5
41,5
45,2
125
-
21
23
37,7
40,7
Determined according to method 4, 2 temperature measured at inlet; 3 Temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple) 4 Temperature measured at the exhaust outlet.
Table No. 13-5-2
Example No. 13-5
Untreated
(n=5)
Process for 30 minutes
(n=5)
60-minute treatment
(n=5)
90 minute treatment,
(n=5)
Curing for 90 minutes, coated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
156
157
154
153
158
Thickness (mm)
4.45
4.66
4.57
4.52
4.51
Diameter(mm)
7.12
7.06
7.04
7.03
7.08
Breaking strength (Newton)
90
438 1
438 1
438 1
438 1
-
4.57
4.68
4.69
4.67
Solubility (what was released %) SGF
One hour
n=6
n=6
Dimensions of discs
Two hours
-
28 (5.0)
29 (5.9)
-
26 (1.4)
4 hours
-
45 (5.2)
45 (5.6)
-
42 (1.4)
8 hours
-
69 (4.8)
70 (4.4)
-
68 (2.0)
12 hour
-
93 (4.2)
94 (4.0)
-
94 (4.0)
Weight(mg)
-
98 (3.9)
102 (5.2)
-
99 (5.1)
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 13.6
Density (g/cm3)1
Density change after processing (%)2
Untreated
Process for 30 minutes
60-minute treatment
90-minute treatment
Example No. 13-1
1.172
1.131
1.134
1.137
-2.986
Example No. 13-2
1.174
1.137
1.137
1.140
-2.896
Example No. 13-3
1.179
1.151
1.152
1.152
-2.290
Example No. 13-4
1.182
1.167
1.168
1.172
-0.846
Example No. 13-5
1.222
1.183
1.183
1.187
-2.864
1 The density value is an average value of three discs measured; 2 The density change after curing corresponds to the density change observed in % in tablets cured for 90 minutes compared to uncured tablets.
In Example 14, five 156 mg tablets (Examples 14-1 through 14-5) containing 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 mg of oxycodone HCl are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, with a comparatively larger batch size. In example No. 13.
Installations:
Example No. 14-1
Example No. 14-2
Example No. 14-3
Example No. 14-4
Example No. 14-5
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
oxycodone HCl
10
15
20
30
40
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5
magnesium stearate
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Total weight of internal parts of tablets (mg)
150
150
150
150
150
Total batch weight
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Unit/mg
Opadry film packaging
6
6
6
6
6
Total tablet weight (mg)
156
156
156
156
156
Packaging batch size (kg)
97.480
98.808
97.864
99.511
98.788
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco Sifter screen equipped with an 841 micron mesh, into a separate suitable vessel.
2- The Gemco “V” mixer (with condensing shaft) 0.283 m3 was filled in the following order:
1/2 polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride approx.
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301.
3- Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
4- The magnesium stearate was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
5- Step 4 materials were mixed for 3 minutes with the condensation column turned off.
6- The Step 5 mixture was filled in clean, tarred, stainless steel containers.
7- The Step 6 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at a speed of 135,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools.
8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 42-inch Accela-Coat packaging container with a load of 97.480 kg (Example 14-1), 98.808 kg (Example 14-2), 97.864 kg (Example 14-3), 99.511 kg (Example 14-3). No. 14-4) and 98.788 kg (Example No. 14-5).
9- The pan speed was set to 7 revolutions per minute, and the tablet bed was heated by adjusting the exhaust air temperature to reach an inlet air temperature of 75°C. The tablets were cured at the target inlet temperature for one hour (Examples 14-1 to 14-5). The starting point used to determine the curing time according to Method 1 was the point at which the inlet temperature reached the target temperature of 75°C.
The temperatures of the curing processes in Examples 14-1 to 14-5 are shown in Tables 14-1-1 to 14-5-1 and Figures 15 to 19.
10- The pan speed was maintained at 7 revolutions per minute in Examples 14-2, 14-4 and 14-5. The bowl speed is increased to 10 rpm in Example 14-1 and to 8 rpm in Example 14-3. For Examples 14-2 to 14-5, 20g of magnesium stearate is added as an anti-tacking agent. The tablet bed was cooled by slowly reducing the exhaust temperature (Examples 14-1) or by directly adjusting the exhaust temperature to 25°C (Examples 14-2) or 30°C (Examples 14-3 to 14-5) until the To a specific exhaust temperature ranging between 30 and 34 C.
11- The disc layer was heated using an exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was initiated as soon as the exhaust temperature approached 39°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was reached.
12- After coating was completed, the bowl speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27 C. The airflow was kept at the currently set value and the system was cooled to an exhaust temperature between 27 and 30 C.
13- The discs have been removed.
Tests were performed in the laboratory, including breaking strength tests and stability tests as follows:
Tablets processed for 1 hour and coated were tested in the laboratory with USP Apparatus (1 basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed using reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a nonbasic potassium phosphate buffer solution. non basic (pH 3.0) and UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include time points 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours. Tablet dimensions and corresponding dissolution results for curing time and temperature are shown in Tables 14-1-2 to 14-5-2.
The untreated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test, imposing a maximum force of 196 Newtons, using a Schleuniger Model 6D device to evaluate tablet resistance breaking.
The cured coated tablets were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 100 unit bottles under different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C 75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and then testing the tablets in the laboratory as follows: shown above. Sample time points for the initial sample (i.e. before storage) include one, two, three and six months of storage, and sample time points for the dissolution test include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
The treated, coated tablets were subjected to a further stability test by storing them in 100 unit bottles under different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C/75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and then subjecting the tablets to an evaluation test to determine the oxycodone content. HCl in tablet samples. Sample time points for the initial sample (i.e. before storage) include one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the assay test, oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two batches of 10 tablets each with a 2:1 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes with continuous magnetic stirring in a 1,000-volume standard vial. ml until all tablets are completely dispersed or overnight.
Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC183.0 x 250 mm, 5 μm column held at 60°C using mobile phase. It consists of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The cured coated tablets were subjected to another stability test by storing them in 100 unit bottles under different storage conditions (25°C/60% relative humidity or 40°C/75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and then subjecting the tablets to the oxycodone-N test. -oxide (ONO) to determine the content of the degradation product oxycodone-N-oxide and unknown degradation products on a percentage basis by weight, relative to the oxycodone HCl brand.
Sample time points in relation to storage include the initial sample (before storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the ONO test, oxycodone hydrochloride and its degradation products were extracted from a batch of 10 tablets each containing 900 mL of a 2:1 acetonitrile mixture and simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzyme with continuous magnetic stirring in a standard 1000-volume vial. Until all the tablets are completely dispersed or overnight. Sample solutions were diluted with reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC183.0 x 250 mm, 5 μm column and held at 60°C using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of Potassium phosphate is monobasic at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 206 nm.
The densities of untreated tablets, treated tablets and treated/coated tablets were determined as shown in Example 13.
The results are shown in the following tables.
Table No. 14-1-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 14-1
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature
(M)
Actual exhaust temperature
(M)3
Bowl speed
(round per minute)
comments
0
-
-
-
-
7
Heating start, loading the pot
20
-
65
57
56
7
21
-
65,0
7
28
-
70,0
7
30
-
72,0
64
63
7
36
0
75,0
65
65
7
Beginning of treatment
Sample 0 min
43
7
73,2
7
46
10
73
67
67
51
15
72,2
7
Sample 15 minutes
56
20
71,8
67
67
8
66
30
75,0
68
68
8
Sample 30 minutes
76
40
73,0
68
68
8
81
45
74,8
8
Sample 45 minutes
86
50
74,3
69
69
8
92
56
72,3
8
96
60
71,0
69
69
8
End of treatment, sample 60 minutes, no magnesium stearate used, start of cooling, tablet flow was viscous
101
-
62,0
8
Beginning of disk flow clumping
104
-
59,2
9
Too much clumping of the flow (the layer of tablets turns into “flakes”)
106
-
57
62
62
10
109
-
54,9
9
The flow is still a little clumpy, but it's getting better
110
-
53,2
8
Return to normal flow of tablets
116
-
48,0
58
58
8
126
-
29,0
30
46
7
132
-
24,0
30
33
7
1Determined according to method 1, 2 Temperature measured at inlet, 3 Temperature measured at exhaust.
Table No. 14-1-2
Example No. 14-1
Untreated
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
Process for 60 minutes, coated
(n=5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150 (n = 120)
150
158
Thickness (mm)
4.42 (n = 5)
4.71
4.75
Diameter(mm)
7.14 (n = 5)
7.05
7.07
Breaking strength (Newton)
68
(n = 100)
196 1
196 1
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
-
-
25
Two hours
-
-
42
4 hours
-
-
67
8 hours
-
-
94
12 hour
-
-
101
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 14-1-3
Stability tests In Example 14-1, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Principled
one month
Two months
3 Months
6 Months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
25
24
24
23
23
Two hours
42
40
38
38
39
4 hours
67
64
61
61
64
8 hours
94
90
87
89
90
12 hour
101
99
94
100
97
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.7
Evaluation 2
9.8
9.9
9.8
9.9
9.8
Average
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.9
9.8
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1Regarding what is written on the oxycodone HCl label.
Table No. 14-1-4
Stability tests In Example 14-1, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Principled
one month
Two months
3 Months
6 Months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
25
25
25
24
23
Two hours
42
-
41
38
39
4 hours
67
66
63
62
64
8 hours
94
-
89
88
90
12 hour
101
100
96
98
96
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
9.8
9.8
9.7
9.6
9.8
Evaluation 2
9.8
10.0
9.7
9.8
9.8
Average
9.8
9.9
9.7
9.7
9.8
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1Regarding what is written on the oxycodone HCl label.
Table No. 14-2-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 14-2
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature
(M)
Actual exhaust temperature
(M)3
Bowl speed
(round per minute)
comments
0
-
18
50
20
7
Heating start, loading the pot
-
41,0
7
5
-
50,0
62,0
8
-
67,7
51,0
50,5
7
Slowly adjust the set exhaust temperature
10
-
71
56
55
14
0
75,0
61,7
61,9
7
Start of processing, sample 0 min
19
5
77,2
61,7
64,8
7
21
7
77,8
7
The inlet temperature rises, then decreases to 71°C
24
10
68,9
65,3
65,3
7
29
15
70,6
66,1
65,5
7
Sample 15 minutes
33
19
72,6
7
34
20
73,6
67,0
66,3
7
36
22
75,0
7
39
25
75,9
67,0
67,3
7
44
30
73,3
67,0
67,4
7
Sample 30 minutes
49
35
70,1
67,2
67,0
7
54
40
71,7
67,5
67,3
7
Some discs are stuck at the bowl-holding arms, but there is no permanent adhesion
59
45
74,3
68,0
67,9
7
Sample 45 minutes
64
50
75
68
68
7
66
52
73,6
68,0
68,2
7
69
55
72,4
68,0
68,1
7
74
60
73,0
68
68
7
End of treatment, sample 60 min, 20 g of Magnesium stearate added, tablet flow was slightly viscous (based on visual examination of flow), flow improved immediately after addition of Magnesium stearate
75
-
73
25
68
7
Normal flow is observed during cooling
78
-
44,7
25
62,3
7
81
-
36,8
25
57,4
7
84
-
31,8
25
54,6
7
85
-
30
25
53
7
94
-
23
25
33
7
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 14-2-2
Example No. 14-2
Untreated
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
60 min treatment, encapsulated (n = 5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150(n = 120)
149
156
Thickness (mm)
4.38 (n = 5)
4.68
4.70
Diameter(mm)
7.13 (n = 5)
7.07
7.09
Breaking strength (Newton)
70
(n = 100)
196 1
196 1
n=6
Solubility (released%)SGF
Dimensions of discs
One hour
-
-
23
Two hours
-
-
39
4 hours
-
-
64
8 hours
-
-
93
12 hour
-
-
100
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 14-2-3
Stability tests In Example 14-2, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
23
24
26
22
24
Two hours
39
40
41
37
40
4 hours
64
65
65
61
65
8 hours
93
91
90
90
91
12 hour
100
100
97
99
99
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
14.6
14.9
14.6
14.7
14.8
Evaluation 2
14.8
14.9
14.7
14.8
14.9
Average
14.7
14.9
14.7
14.7
14.8
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-2-4
Stability tests In Example 14-2, storage at 40°C/75% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
23
25
26
22
24
Two hours
39
41
42
36
40
4 hours
64
66
66
58
65
8 hours
93
94
92
87
91
12 hour
100
102
97
97
98
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
14.6
14.8
14.7
14.6
14.9
Evaluation 2
14.8
14.8
14.7
14.5
14.7
Average
14.7
14.8
14.7
14.5
14.8
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-3-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 14-3
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature
(M)
Actual exhaust temperature
(M)3
Bowl speed
(round per minute)
comments
0
-
17,1
50
18
7
Heating start, loading the pot
5
-
61,0
50
42,5
7
10
-
70,2
56
55,8
7
15
0
75,0
61,6
61,9
7
Start of processing, sample 0 min
20
5
78,5
62,8
65,4
7
22
7
79,0
62,8
66,3
7
High inlet temperature
25
10
69,7
65,6
65,6
7
30
15
68,4
66,0
65,3
7
Sample 15 minutes
35
20
72,4
66,7
66,1
7
40
25
75,6
67,5
67,3
7
45
30
76,9
68,0
67,9
7
Sample 30 minutes
55
40
73,0
68,4
68,2
7
60
45
73,9
68,6
68,4
7
Al-Aita 45 minutes
65
50
75
68,9
68,8
7
68
53
-
-
-
7
Some tablets (1 - 4) stuck at the bowl arms, good tablet flow
70
55
76,2
69,6
69,6
8
75
60
77,0
70,5
70,8
8
End of treatment, sample 60 minutes, addition of 20 g of magnesium stearate, tablet flow improved immediately
76
-
76
30
71
8
Normal flow of tablets during cooling
There is no adhesion
79
-
43,9
30
60,6
8
85
-
31,1
30
54,1
8
86
-
30
30
53
8
96
-
23
30
33
8
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust.
Table No. 14-3-2
Example No. 14-3
Untreated
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
60 min treatment, encapsulated (n = 5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150 (n = 120)
150
156
Thickness (mm)
4.38 (n = 5)
4.69
4.67
Diameter(mm)
7.14 (n = 5)
7.08
7.10
Breaking strength (Newton)
64 (n = 110)
196 1
196 1
Y
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Dimensions of discs
One hour
-
-
24
Two hours
-
-
41
4 hours
-
-
66
8 hours
-
-
92
12 hour
-
-
98
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 14-3-3
Stability tests In Example 14-2, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
24
25
22
24
21
Two hours
41
42
38
40
38
4 hours
66
69
61
66
63
8 hours
92
96
89
91
88
12 hour
98
102
97
99
96
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
19.6
19.4
19.5
19.4
19.8
Evaluation 2
19.4
19.3
19.4
19.4
19.4
Average
19.5
19.4
19.4
19.4
19.6
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-3-4
Stability tests In Example 14-3, storage at 40°C/75% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
24
27
24
23
22
Two hours
41
44
40
39
40
4 hours
66
70
63
63
65
8 hours
92
94
90
89
90
12 hour
98
102
98
98
98
Evaluation test
mg oxycodone HCl
Rating 1
19.6
19.3
19.6
19.3
19.7
Evaluation 2
19.4
19.3
19.7
19.4
19.4
Average
19.5
19.3
19.6
19.4
19.6
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-4-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 14-4
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Tablet bed temperature
(M) 3
Designated exhaust temperature
(M)4
Actual exhaust temperature
Notes5
0
Heating start, loading the pot
3
63، 0
46، 5
50، 0
41، 2
5
66، 7
49، 9
50، 0
48، 0
10
0
75، 0
60، 5
60، 0
59، 0
Start of processing, sample 0 min
14
4
78، 4
65، 2
61، 5
63، 6
15
5
79، 1
66، 0
61، 5
64، 5
20
10
67، 6
66، 2
63، 0
64، 7
24
15
69، 2
66، 7
65، 7
64، 9
Sample 15 minutes
28
19
73، 0
67، 8
66، 4
65، 8
29
20
73، 5
68، 0
67، 0
66، 0
32
23
75، 6
69، 0
67، 0
66، 7
34
25
75، 9
69، 4
67، 0
67، 0
39
30
76، 5
70، 2
67، 7
67، 7
Sample 30 minutes
44
35
76، 8
70، 8
68، 2
68، 2
47
38
76، 7
71، 0
68، 8
68، 4
Some discs (1 - 4) are stuck at the bowl-bearing arms, but there is no permanent sticking
49
40
77، 4
71، 0
69، 3
68، 7
52
43
78، 7
71، 5
69، 5
69، 2
54
45
79، 1
72، 1
70، 0
69، 5
Sample 45 minutes
58
49
-
73، 3
-
-
59
50
81، 0
73، 8
70، 1
70، 8
65
56
73، 0
74، 1
71، 7
71، 5
69
60
74، 0
74، 5
71، 7
71، 3
End of treatment, sample 60 minutes, addition of 20 g of Magnesium stearate, start of cooling, tablet flow was slightly viscous (based on visual examination of flow), still some tablets stuck to the vessel arms, flow/gradation improved immediately After adding Magnesium stearate
72
-
48، 9
65، 3
30، 0
65، 3
Normal flow of tablets is observed during cooling
75
-
39، 7
58، 6
30، 0
56، 8
79
-
33، 2
56، 4
30، 0
54، 6
84
-
27، 7
50، 0
30، 0
48، 4
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at the inlet, 3 bed temperature tablet bed temperature, i.e. temperature of the matrix formulations extended release, measured using an infrared emitting device, 4 temperature measured at the exhaust outlet 5. The pan speed was 7 revolutions per minute throughout the curing process.
Table No. 14-4-2
Example No. 14-4
Untreated
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
60 min treatment, encapsulated (n = 5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150 (n = 120)
149
157
Thickness (mm)
4.34 (n = 5)
4.60
4.63
Diameter(mm)
7.14 (n = 5)
7.09
7.14
Breaking strength (Newton)
61 (n = 100)
196 1
196 1
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Dimensions of discs
One hour
-
-
22
Two hours
-
-
39
4 hours
-
-
66
8 hours
-
-
94
12 hour
-
-
100
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 14-4-3
Stability tests: In Example 14-4, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
22
23
24
24
23
Two hours
39
39
39
41
40
4 hours
66
64
63
68
65
8 hours
94
91
88
93
91
12 hour
100
98
96
99
98
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
28.8
28.8
28.4
28.8
29.2
Evaluation 2
29.1
29.0
28.8
28.8
29.2
Average
29.0
28.9
28.6
28.8
29.2
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-4-4
Stability tests In Example 14-4, storage at 40°C/75% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
22
26
24
24
24
Two hours
39
44
41
41
41
4 hours
66
70
64
67
67
8 hours
94
93
88
92
93
12 hour
100
99
96
98
98
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
28.8
29.3
28.2
29.0
28.4
Evaluation 2
29.1
29.3
28.1
28.9
28.6
Average
29.0
29.3
28.1
28.9
28.5
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-5-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 14-5
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Tablet bed temperature
(M) 3
Designated exhaust temperature
(M)4
Actual exhaust temperature
Notes5
0
-
16، 6
30
60، 0
19، 7
Heating start, loading the pot
-
-
32
60، 0
-
4
-
56، 8
39، 8
60، 0
36، 7
5
-
60، 1
43، 9
60، 0
40، 4
8
-
66، 8
52، 5
60، 0
49، 4
10
-
69، 1
56، 9
60، 0
53، 8
13
-
71، 7
61، 3
60، 0
58، 8
15
-
73، 3
63، 5
61، 0
60، 8
17
0
75، 0
65، 3
63، 0
62، 5
Start of processing, sample 0 min
21
4
77، 7
67، 3
66، 0
65، 0
23
6
78، 8
68، 1
67، 0
65، 9
25
8
79، 9
69، 3
67، 0
66، 7
27
10
80، 9
69، 5
67، 0
67، 3
30
13
82، 4
70، 1
67، 0
68، 2
32
15
83، 1
70، 8
70، 0
68، 7
Sample 15 minutes
37
20
80، 9
72، 4
70، 4
69، 4
38
21
80، 9
71، 8
71، 0
69، 5
42
25
82، 5
73، 1
72، 0
70، 4
Good flow and gradation of tablets
45
28
84، 2
76، 6
71، 0
72، 2
47
30
82، 7
77، 6
72، 2
74، 1
Sample 30 minutes
49
32
72، 9
74، 7
72، 2
73، 2
Slightly viscous flow of discs, sticking of 1-2 discs at the bearing arms
52
35
71، 2
73، 8
72، 2
71، 4
56
39
75، 4
74، 7
72، 2
71، 5
57
40
75، 9
74، 7
72، 2
71، 9
60
43
76، 9
75، 5
72، 2
72، 8
62
45
75، 4
75، 3
72، 2
72، 9
Sample 45 minutes
66
49
73، 4
74، 5
72، 2
71، 8
Slightly viscous flow of tablets, 1-2 tablets sticking at the bearing arms (no permanent sticking)
69
52
75، 0
75، 1
72، 2
71، 9
72
55
75، 8
75، 4
72، 2
72، 4
74
57
74، 8
74، 8
72، 2
72، 5
77
60
73، 9
74، 9
72، 2
72، 2
End of processing, sample 60 min, 20 g Magnesium stearate added, immediate flow/gradient improvement, start of cooling, no sticking at vessel arms
80
-
46، 8
64، 9
30، 0
64، 7
Cooling
-
-
-
-
30، 0
-
Sticking of two discs at the bearing arms (no permanent sticking)
82
-
40، 3
58، 6
30، 0
57، 4
The tablets still feel rubbery, no adhesion is observed
84
-
35، 8
57، 4
30، 0
55، 6
Observe the normal flow of the tablets during the cooling period. Continue cooling until the exhaust temperature is between 30 and 34°C to begin packaging
86
-
32، 5
55، 9
30، 0
54، 2
87
-
30، 3
54، 1
30، 0
52، 8
89
-
28، 8
51، 8
30، 0
51، 3
91
-
26، 9
47، 2
30، 0
47، 9
97
-
-
~ 29
30، 0
-
The top layer of tablets is 30.3 °C, the bottom of the layer of tablets is 28.5 °C
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at the inlet, 3 bed temperature tablet bed temperature, i.e. temperature of the matrix formulations extended release, measured using an infrared emitting device, 4 temperature measured at the exhaust outlet 5. The bowl speed was 7 rpm throughout the curing process.
Example No. 14-5
Untreated
60-minute treatment (n = 5)
60 min treatment, encapsulated (n = 5)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
150 (n = 120)
149
155
Thickness (mm)
4.30 (n = 5)
4.49
4.52
Diameter(mm)
7.15 (n = 5)
7.10
7.15
Breaking strength (Newton)
55 (n = 110)
1196
1196
n=6
Solubility (what was released %) SGF
One hour
-
-
24
Two hours
-
-
41
4 hours
-
-
68
8 hours
-
-
93
12 hour
-
-
98
1 Maximum force of the hardness tester. The discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.
Table No. 14-5-3
Stability tests In Example 14-5, storage at 25°C/60% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
24
25
27
23
25
Two hours
41
43
44
40
43
4 hours
68
69
69
66
69
8 hours
93
94
93
89
92
12 hour
98
98
97
96
96
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
37.8
38.4
36.9
37.6
39.2
Evaluation 2
37.9
37.6
36.5
38.1
39.2
Average
37.8
38.0
36.7
37.9
39.2
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Table No. 14-5-4
Stability tests In Example 14-5, storage at 40°C/75% relative humidity
Initial
one month
Two months
Three months
six months
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
SGF
One hour
24
26
27
25
25
Two hours
41
-
45
42
43
4 hours
68
71
72
68
69
8 hours
93
-
95
93
92
12 hour
98
97
98
99
95
Evaluation test
(mg oxycodone HCl)
Rating 1
37.8
38.3
37.3
37.6
37.9
Evaluation 2
37.9
38.6
36.9
37.6
38.1
Average
37.8
38.5
37.1
37.6
38.0
oxycodone N-oxide (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Every single product is unknown (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
Total decomposition products (%)1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
≤ 0.1
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl.
Density (g/cm3)
Density change after processing (%)
Density change after processing and packaging (%)
Untreated
to treat
Processed and coated
Example No. 14-1
1.186
1.145
1.138
-3.457
-4.047
Example No. 14-2
1.184
1.152
1.129
-2.703
-4.645
Example No. 14-3
1.183
1.151
1.144
-2.705
-3.297
Example No. 14-4
1.206
1.162
1.130
-3.648
-6.302
Example No. 14-5
1.208
1.174
1.172
-2.815
-2.980
Example No. 15
In Example 15, two different tablet formulations of oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. The weight of the tablet in one of the two formulations was 234 mg (Example No. 15-1) containing 60 mg of oxycodone HCl, and in the other it was 260 mg (Example No. 15-2) containing 80 mg of oxycodone HCl.
Installations:
Example No. 15-1
Example No. 15-2
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
60
80
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
162.75
167.5
magnesium stearate
2.25
2.50
Total tablet weight (mg)
225
250
Total batch weight
10 kg
10 kg
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
9
10
Total tablet weight (mg)
234
260
Packaging batch size (kg)
8.367
8.205
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The 16 quart Patterson Kelly V mixer (I-shaped shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 polyethylene oxide WSR 301 oxycodone hydrochloride (filtered through 841 micron mesh)
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 5 minutes with the I bar condensation column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer (filtered through an 841 micron mesh).
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the condensation column turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag (Note: Two 5 kg mixtures were prepared to provide 10 kg tablet mixture for pressing).
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet press at a speed of 35,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools. A sample was taken from the inner parts of the discs.
7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 24-inch Compu-Lab coating pan with a load of 8.367 kg (Example 15-1), 8.205 kg (Example 15-2), 9.403 kg (Example 13-3), and 8.717 kg. (Example No. 13-4), 8.902 kg (Example No. 13-5).
8- A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed in the bowl directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the cascading bed tablets.
9- The pan speed was set to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to reach a target exhaust temperature of 72°C. The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached 72°C. The inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were processed for 15 minutes. The bowl speed was kept at 10 rpm. The temperatures of the curing processes in Examples 15-1 and 15-2 are shown in Tables 15-1-1 and 15-2-1.
10- The pan speed was maintained at 10 revolutions per minute. The inlet temperature was set to 22°C and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of 30.0°C was reached. A sample was taken from the cured tablets at the end of cooling.
11- The disc layer was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 53°C. Film coating was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached approximately 41°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The vessel speed was increased until it reached 20 rpm in the film coating vessel.
12- After the film coating was completed, the vessel speed was reduced (3 to 6 revolutions per minute), the inlet temperature was set to 22°C, the airflow was maintained at the currently set value, and the system was cooled until the exhaust temperature became < 30. M. A sample was taken from the treated/coated tablets.
13- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests as follows:
Tablet cores (untreated tablets), 15-minute tablets, and treated/coated tablets were tested in the laboratory using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket with retention spring positioned on top of the basket to reduce susceptibility of the tablet to the shaft base) at 100 rpm In 900 ml of non-simulated gastric fluid (SGF) at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (pH pH 3.0) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 12.0 and 16.0 hours.
The inner parts of the tablets (untreated), the 15-minute treated tablets and the treated/coated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 to evaluate the breaking strength of the tablets.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are shown in Tables 15-1-2 to 15-2-2.
Table No. 15-1-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 15-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)2
Actual inlet temperature
(M)
Probe temperature
(M)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)3
comments
0
-
22 To 85
47.4
-
26.4
Heating start, loading the pot
10
-
85
81.3
66.3
62.0
20
-
85
84.8
73.7
70.4
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
25.5
0
85 To 74
85.0
75.1
72.0
Beginning of treatment, when the inlet temperature is significantly reduced to 74°C, the exhaust temperature is reduced to 70.9°C, the inlet temperature is reset to 80°C.
30.5
5
80
80.0
73.6
71.9
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
35.5
10
75
75.8
72.2
73.3
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
40.5
15
73 To 22
72.8
70.6
71.9
End of processing, good flow of tablets, no adhesion, beginning of cooling
60
-
22
21.5
27.9
31.4
61
-
22
22.0
27.2
29.7
End of cooling, no adhesion observed during cooling, good tablet flow, treated tablet sample taken
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 15-1-2
Example No. 15-1
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
Laminated
n=3
n=3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
28
28
24
Two hours
44
44
41
4 hours
69
69
67
6 hours
85
85
84
8 hour
95
95
93
12 hour
102
102
99
16 hour
104
103
102
Table No. 15-2-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 15.2
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature
(M) 2
Probe temperature
(M) 3
Exhaust temperature (°C) 4
comments
0
-
22 To 80
23.3
27.7
25.5
Heating start
10
-
80
77.0
62.2
60.4
20
-
80
80.0
70.1
68.4
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
30
-
80
80.1
72.5
70.6
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
35
0
80
79.9
73.6
72.0
start of treatment;
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
38
3
-
-
-
72.7
Maximum exhaust temperature
40
5
74
73.5
71.8
72.3
45
10
74
73.9
71.9
72.3
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
50
15
74 To 22
74.2
72.0
72.4
End of processing, beginning of cooling
71
-
22
21.7
28.4
30.0
End of cooling, no adhesion observed during cooling, good flow of tablets, taking a sample of the treated tablets
Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 15-2-2
Example No. 15-2
Untreated (n=25)
15-minute treatment (n = 5)
Encapsulated (n=5)
Dimensions of discs
254
250
257
4.20
4.28
4.29
92
196 1
194 2
N=3
n=3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
26
28
25
Two hours
43
42
39
4 hours
65
67
64
6 hours
83
83
82
8 hour
92
94
92
12 hour
101
102
100
16 hour
104
103
102
1 The maximum force of the hardness tester, the discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons.2 Four of the discs did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newtons, and one of the discs showed a fracture resistance of 185 Newtons (sample average, n = 5, 194 N).
Example No. 16:
In Example 16, two different tablet formulations of oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. The weight of the tablet in one of the two formulations was 234 mg (Example No. 16-1) and contained 60 mg of oxycodone HCl, and in the other it was 260 mg (Example No. 16-2) and contained 80 mg of oxycodone HCl.
Both formulations are manufactured in a larger batch size compared to Example 15.
Installations:
Example No. 16-1
Example No. 16-2
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
60
80
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
162.75
167.5
magnesium stearate
2.25
2.50
Total tablet weight (mg)
225
250
Total batch weight
100 kg
100 kg
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
Packaging with opadry film
9
10
Total tablet weight (mg)
234
260
Packaging batch size (kg)
94.122
93.530
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- Oxycodone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a sieve equipped with an 841 micron mesh, into appropriate separate vessels.
2 Gemco V mixer (with I-shaft) filled 0.283 m3
In the following order: 1/2 of polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
3- Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the I bar condensation column running.
4- The magnesium stearate was filled into the Gemco V mixer.
5- Step 4 materials were mixed for two minutes with the I bar condensing column turned off.
6- The Step 5 mixture was filled in clean, tarred stainless steel containers.
7. The Step 6 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40-tablet press at a speed of 35,000 tablets per hour using 7.62/20.32 cm standard round concave embossed tools, a compressive force of 16.2 kN for Example 16-1, and a force The pressure is 16.0 kN for Example 16-2. A sample was taken from the internal parts of the discs.
8- Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 121.92 cm coating pan Compu-Lab with a load of 94.122 kg (Example No. 16-1), 93.530 kg (Example No. 16-2).
9- The pan speed was set to 7 revolutions per minute and the disc layer was heated by adjusting the exhaust temperature to reach an exhaust temperature of 72°C. The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached 72°C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 15 minutes. The temperatures of the curing processes in Examples 16-1 and 16-2 are shown in Tables 16-1-1 and 16-2-1.
10- The bowl speed was maintained at 7 revolutions per minute. The exhaust temperature was set to 22°C and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of 30°C was reached.
11- The disc layer was heated by adjusting the exhaust temperature to range between 30°C and 38°C. Film coating was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached approximately 40°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The pan speed was kept at 20 rpm during film coating.
12- After film coating was completed, the bowl speed was reduced to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27°C, the airflow was kept at the currently set value and the tablet bed was cooled until the exhaust temperature became < 30 M.
13- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests as follows:
Coated tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket with a retention spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the ability of the tablet to stick to the stick base shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes At a temperature of 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (pH 3.0). ) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Uncured tablets are subjected to weight, thickness and hardness tests on the production line using a key checkweigher.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are shown in Tables 16-1-2 to 16-2-2.
Table No. 16-1-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 16-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)
Infrared emitting device temperature (°C)2
Specific exhaust temperature (°C)2
Exhaust temperature (°C) 4
comments
0
-
34
32
65
24
Heating start
5
-
82
54
65
49
10
-
89
68
65
63
11
-
-
-
72
-
15
-
91
71
72
67
20
-
91
75
72
70
21
0
92
79
72
72
Beginning of treatment
26
5
90
85
70
79
30
9
63
-
-
-
31
10
69
74
72
69
36
15
80
78
72
72
37
16
80
77
72 to 25
73
End of processing, good flow of tablets, no adhesion, beginning of cooling
42
-
31
57
25
54
47
-
25
50
25
49
52
-
22
36
25
36
57
-
22
26
25
29
End of cooling, no sticking observed during cooling, good tablet flow
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using an infrared emitting device, 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 16-1-2
Example No. 16-1
Untreated
(n = 70)
Laminated
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
224.6
-
Thickness (mm)
3.77
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
5.7
-
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
-
24
Two hours
-
41
4 hours
-
67
8 hours
-
93
12 hour
-
99
Table No. 16-2-1: Temperatures of the treatment processes in Example No. 16-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Infrared emitting device temperature (°C)3
Specific exhaust temperature (°C)2
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
26
22
20
23
2
-
-
-
20 To 65
-
Heating start
7
-
84
61
65
56
12
-
89
69
65
65
13.5
-
90
-
66
66
14.5
-
89
-
67
67
16.5
-
-
-
68
67
17
-
90
72
68
68
19
-
91
73
68
69
20
-
91
-
68
70
21
-
-
-
68
71
22
0
91
77
68
72
Beginning of treatment
24
2
90
81
70
75
24.5
2.5
-
-
70
76
25
3
90
-
72
77
26
4
90
-
72
78
27.5
5.5
-
-
72
79
28
6
82
83
72
78
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
32
10
65
73
72
69
33
11
-
-
-
68
35
13
79
74
72
70
37
15
81
76
72 to 25
72
End of treatment, good tablet flow, no sticking
42
-
32
56
25
54
47
-
25
50
25
48
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
52
-
22
36
25
36
56
-
21
29
25
30
End of cooling, no sticking observed during cooling, good flow of tablets
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using an infrared emitting device, 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 16-2-2
Example No. 16-2
Untreated
(n = 60)
Laminated
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
250.8
-
Thickness (mm)
4.05
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
6.8
-
3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
-
22
Two hours
-
37
4 hours
-
62
8 hours
-
89
12 hour
-
97
Example No. 17:
In Example 17, two different oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 60 mg of oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. The formula in Example No. 17-1 is the same as in Example No. 15-1. The second formulation (Example 17-2) contains 0.1% butylated hydroxytoluene. Each tablet formulation was cured at the target exhaust temperature of 72°C and 75°C for 15 minutes, followed by film coating, then an additional curing step at the target exhaust temperature for 30 minutes.
Installations:
Example No. 17-1
Example No. 17-2
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
60
60
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
162.75
162.525
Butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT)
0
0.225
magnesium stearate
2.25
2.25
Total weight of the inner part of the disc
225
225
Total batch weight
5 kg
10 kg
4
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
9
9
Total tablet weight (mg)
234
234
Packaging batch size (kg)
2 kg at 72m
6 kg at 72m
2 kg at 75m
2 kg at 75m
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The 16 quart Patterson Kelly V mixer (I-shaped shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 of polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride (filtered through an 841 micron mesh)
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 5 minutes with the I bar condensation column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer.
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the I bar condensing column turned off.
5- The mixture of step 4 was packed in a plastic bag (note: two 5 kg mixtures were prepared for Example 17.2 to provide 10 kg of tablet mixture for pressing).
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet press at 30,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools. The compression in Example No. 17-1 was done at a compressive force of 12 kN and in Example No. 17-2 at a compressive force of 6 kN, 12 kN and 18 kN.
7- Step 6 tablets are loaded into a coating pan Accela-Coat 38.1 cm (for a 2 kg batch) or 60.96 cm (for a 6 kg batch).
8- A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed in the bowl directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the cascading bed tablets.
9- The pan speed was set to a speed between 7 and 10 revolutions per minute, and the tablet bed was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to reach a target exhaust temperature of 72°C or 75°C. The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature was reached. The inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were cured for 15 minutes. The bowl speed was kept at the current rpm. The temperature values for the curing processes in Examples 17-1 and 17-2 are shown in Tables 17-1-1 and 17-2-1.
10- The pan speed was maintained at the current rpm. The inlet temperature was set to 20°C or 22°C, and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of 30°C was reached.
Note: No magnesium stearate was used.
11- The disc layer was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to a temperature ranging between 52 and 54 C. Film coating was started once the exhaust temperature was between approximately 39 and 42°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The bowl speed was increased to 15 or 20 rpm during film coating.
12- After film coating was completed, the bowl speed was reduced to the level used during curing. The tablet bed was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature so that the target exhaust temperature of 72 °C or 75 °C was reached. The curing starting point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the target exhaust temperature was reached. The inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The coated tablets were processed for an additional 30 minutes. The bowl speed was kept at the current rpm. The temperature values for the additional curing process in Examples 17-1 and 17-2 are shown in Tables 17-1-1 and 17-2-1.
13- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests as follows:
[The internal portions of tablets (untreated tablets), treated tablets, and treated/coated tablets were tested using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket with retention spring positioned on top of basket to reduce susceptibility of the tablet to the base shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (No. pH 3.0) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 12.0 and 16.0 hours.
The untreated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate the tablets' break resistance.
The dimensions of the tablets and their dissolution results are shown in Tables 17-1-2 to 17-2-2.
Table No. 17-1- 1
The curing process at a temperature of 72 °C in Example No. 17-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
22 To 80
25.5
28.4
28.5
Heating start
10
-
80
80.2
69.6
68.1
19
0
80 To 78
80.0
73.2
72.0
Beginning of treatment
24
5
78
77.9
73.2
73.0
29
10
75
75.0
71.8
72.3
34
15
75
75.0
72.3
72.0
End of processing, beginning of cooling
50
-
22
22.8
28.2
29.2
End of cooling, prepare for packaging
0
-
22 To 80
25.5
28.4
28.5
Heating start
Place a 4% film coating on the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
48 To 80
47.8
45.1
43.1
Heating starter for further processing
5
-
80
80.0
68.7
64.9
13
0
80 To 76
80.1
73.2
72.0
Beginning of further processing
28
15
75
74.9
72.0
72.4
15 Minutes of additional processing
43
30
74 To 22
74.0
71.5
72.1
30 Minute of further processing, start of cooling
55
-
22
24.6
32.2
34
End of cooling, take out the discs
The curing process at a temperature of 75 ° C in Example No. 17-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
42 To 80
42.1
38.6
38.5
Heating start
18
-
80 To 83
80.1
73.0
72.4
21
0
82
81.5
75.1
75.0
Beginning of treatment
26
5
77
76.6
73.5
74.7
31
10
77.5
77.4
73.8
75.0
36
15
77.5 to 22
77.6
74.1
75.2
End of processing, beginning of cooling
53
-
22
23.1
29.5
29.6
End of cooling, prepare for packaging
Place a 4% film coating on the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
48 To 83
48.1
44.4
41.5
Heating starter for further processing
12
0
83
83.1
75.1
75.0
Beginning of further processing
27
15
78
78.11
74.4
75.4
15 Minutes of additional processing
42
30
76.5 to 22
76.5
73.9
74.9
30 Minute of further processing, start of cooling
56
-
22
23.9
30.3
30.0
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 17-1-2
Example No. 17-1
Untreated
(n=25)
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
225
-
-
Thickness (mm)
3.86
-
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
75
-
-
Example No. 17-1 Processing at 72°C
Example No. 17-1 Processing at 75°C
Process for 15 minutes
Laminated
Process for 15 minutes
Laminated
n=3
n=3
n=6
n=3
n=3
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
One hour
27
27
26
28
26
Two hours
44
42
41
44
42
4 hours
68
67
66
69
67
6 hours
83
83
84
85
83
8 hours
93
92
93
95
93
10 hours
99
100
100
100
98
12 hour
100
102
102
102
99
Table No. 17-2-1
The curing process at a temperature of 72 ° C in Example No. 17-2
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
80
34.8
33.8
32.1
Bowl load 6kg; Heating start
10
-
80
76.5
64.5
63.3
20
-
80
80.1
71.1
69.9
27.5
0
80
80.3
73.0
72.0
Beginning of treatment
32.5
5
73.0
73.3
71.0
73.3
37.5
10
72.5
72.7
70.2
71.8
42.5
15
73.6 to 22
73.5
70.6
72.1
End of processing, beginning of cooling
61
-
22
22.7
30.1
30
End of cooling, prepare for packaging
Place a 4% film coating on the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
80 To 53
53
-
39.5
Heating starter for further processing
15
-
80
79.9
72.3
69.7
18
0
80
79.9
74.1
72.0
Beginning of further processing
33
15
73.5
73.4
70.9
72.3
15 Minutes of additional processing
48
30
73.5
73.5
71.4
72.5
30 Minute of further processing, start of cooling
64
-
23.0
23.9
-
30.0
End of cooling, take out the discs
The curing process at a temperature of 75 °C in Example No. 17-2
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
82
52.9
53
48.4
Bowl load 2kg; Heating start
12
-
82
82.2
75.4
72.8
16
-
82 To 85
72.6
70.0
69.7
23.5
0
85 To 82
81.8
76.4
75.0
Beginning of treatment
26.5
3
82 To 80
81.8
77.2
77.0
32
8.5
78
80.1
76.8
77.1
38.5
15
78
78
75.6
76.1
End of processing, beginning of cooling
53
-
20
32.4
30.0
32.1
End of cooling, prepare for packaging
Place a 4% film coating on the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
53.5 to 83
53.7
-
46.5
Heating starter for further processing
-
0
83
83
73.7
75
Beginning of further processing
-
15
78
77.9
74.3
75.9
15 Minutes of additional processing
-
23
78
78
75.1
76.3
-
30
78 To 22
78
75.1
76.4
30 Minute of further processing, start of cooling
-
-
22
23.6
31.0
32.1
End of cooling (15 minutes of additional processing), take out the tablets
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 17.2.2
Example No. 17-2
Untreated inner portions of discs (n=5)
Compressive force (kN)
6
12
18
12
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
226
227
227
226
Thickness (mm)
3.93
3.87
3.86
3.91
Breaking strength (Newton)
43
71
83
72
Example No. 17-2 where processing at 72°C (6 kg batch)
Example No. 17-2 where processing at 75°C (2 kg batch)
Process for 15 minutes, coated
Untreated (internal parts)
Process for 15 minutes
Laminated
Compressive force (kN)
6
12
18
12
n=3
N=3
n=3
n=3
n=3
n=3
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Without yay
One hour
25
23
23
26
27
24
Two hours
41
39
37
41
43
40
4 hours
65
64
59
64
66
64
6 hours
80
81
75
79
81
80
8 hours
90
91
86
88
91
90
12 hours
98
100
97
99
101
100
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Basket with yay
One hour
26
24
Two hours
42
40
4 hours
66
66
6 hours
83
83
8 hours
93
92
12 hour
100
98
16 hours
102
101
In Example 18, four different oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 80 mg of oxycodone HCl are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide with a tablet weight of 250 mg. Two of the four formulas (Examples 18-2 and 18-3) contained 1% butylated hydroxytoluene. Three formulas (Examples 18-1, 18-2 and 18-3) contained 1% magnesium stearate. One formula (Example 18-3) contained 5% magnesium stearate.
Installations:
Example No. 18-1
Example No. 18-2
Example No. 18-3
Example No. 18-4
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
80
(32٪)
80
(32٪)
80
(32٪)
80
(32٪)
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
167.5
(67٪)
167.25
(66.9٪)
166.25
(67.4٪)
166.25
(66.5٪)
Butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT)
0
0.25
(0.1٪)
0.25
(0.1٪)
1.25
(0.5٪)
magnesium stearate
2.5
(1٪)
2.5
(1٪)
1.25
(0.5٪)
2.5
(1٪)
Total weight of the inner part of the disc
250
250
250
250
4
Total batch weight
5 and 6.3
5
5
5
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
do not apply
7.5
10
do not apply
Total tablet weight (mg)
do not apply
257.5
260
do not apply
Packaging batch size (kg)
do not apply
1.975
2.0
do not apply
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The 16 quart Patterson Kelly V mixer (I-shaped shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 of polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride
BHT (if required)
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 10 minutes (Example No. 18-1, 6.3 kg batch size), 6 minutes (Example No. 18-2), or 5 minutes (Example No. 18-1, 5 kg batch size, Examples 18). -3, 18-4) with the I bar condensing column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer.
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the condensation column turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag.
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet press. The specific elements of pressure are shown in Tables 18-1 to 18-4.
7- Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 18-inch Accela-Coat container with a load of 15 kg (Example 18-1, cured at 72°C), 2.0 kg (Example 18-1, cured at 75°C). 1.975 kg (Example No. 18-2, curing at 72 °C and 75 °C), 2.0 kg (Example 18-4, curing at 72 °C and 75 °C).
8- A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed in the bowl directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the moving tablet bed.
9. For Examples 18-1 through 18-4, the tablet layer is heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to reach a target exhaust temperature of 72 C, 75 C, or 78. The starting point of curing is initiated (as described in Method 2) Once the target exhaust temperature has been reached. Once the target exhaust temperature was reached, the inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were processed for durations ranging from 15 minutes to 90 minutes. After curing, the tablet layer was cooled. The temperature values for the curing processes in Examples 18-1 to 18-4 are shown in Tables 18-1-1 to 18-4-1.
10- After cooling, the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 53°C (Examples 18-2 and 18-3, and for Examples 18-1 and 18-4 no film coating was performed). Film coating was initiated once the exhaust temperature was approximately 40°C and continued until the target weight gain of 3% (Example 18-2) 4% (Example 18-3) was achieved.
11- After completing the film coating (Example No. 18-2), the tablet layer was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature so that the target exhaust temperature was reached (72 °C for a certain batch size and 75 °C for another batch size).
The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the target exhaust temperature was reached. Once the target exhaust temperature was reached, the inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The film-coated tablets were processed for an additional 30 minutes.
After further processing, the tablet layer was cooled. The temperature values for the additional curing process are shown in Example No. 18-2 in Table No. 18-2-1.
12- The pan speed was reduced and the inlet temperature was set to 22°C. The system is cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30°C.
13- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests and stability tests as follows:
Tablet cores (untreated tablets), treated tablets, and treated/coated tablets were tested in the laboratory using a USP Apparatus 1 (some tests included a basket with a retaining spring positioned on top of the basket to reduce the susceptibility of the tablet to the shaft base) at 100 rpm at 900 ml of simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (pH 3.0). ) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours. The untreated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate the tablets' break resistance. The tablets manufactured in Example No. 18-4 (processed at 72 °C and 75 °C, respectively) were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 6-unit bottles under different storage conditions (25 °C/60% relative humidity, or 40 °C/75% relative humidity or 50°C) for a certain period and then test the tablets in the laboratory as described above. Sample time points in relation to storage time include the initial sample (i.e. before storage), 2 weeks and 1 month. Sample time points with respect to thawing time include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
The dimensions of the tablets and their dissolution results are shown in Tables 18-2-2 to 18-4-2.
Table No. 18-1-1
The curing process at a temperature of 72 ° C in Example No. 17-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
23 To 80
24.8
28.4
28.9
Bowl load 1.5kg; Heating start
10
-
80
76.4
65.5
65.2
15
-
80
79.9
70.8
70.3
20
0
80 To 78
80.0
72.3
72.0
Beginning of treatment
25
5
78 To 75
76.6
71.9
72.9
35
15
75
75
71.4
72.0
the sample
40
20
75
75.1
71.7
72.5
50
30
75
74.9
72.0
72.7
the sample
60
40
74
73.9
71.4
72.2
65
45
74
74
71.5
72.1
the sample
80
60
74
74
71.2
71.8
the sample
95
75
74
73.9
71.7
72.3
the sample
110
90
74 To 22
74
71.7
72.3
End of treatment, take a sample, add 0.3g of magnesium stearate, start cooling
129
-
22
23.1
27.4
26.9
End of cooling, no adhesion during cooling, take out the tablets
The curing process at a temperature of 75 ° C in Example No. 17-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
23 To 85
24.1
25.0
24.9
Bowl load 2kg; Heating start
10
-
85
79.6
67.4
66.5
15
-
85
85
73.8
72.3
19
0
85 To 82
85.1
76.2
75
Beginning of treatment
22
3
82 To 80
80.5
75.3
76.2
29
10
78
78
74.2
75.1
34
15
78
78.2
73.6
75.1
a sample
49
30
78
77.8
74.5
75.5
a sample
59
40
77.5
77.6
74.66
75.4
64
45
77.5
77.6
74.8
75.4
a sample
79
60
77.5
77.6
74.6
75.1
a sample
94
75
77.5
77.5
74.5
75.1
Sample, minimal adhesion
109
90
77.5
77.6
75.0
75.6
End of processing, sampling, beginning of cooling
116
-
22
30.6
42.6
46.7
Minimal adhesion at the bearing arms
122
-
22
25
-
33.5
End of cooling
The curing process at a temperature of 78 ° C in Example No. 18-1
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
82
35
37.6
35.9
Bowl load 2kg; Heating start
7
-
85
84.9
71.3
69.8
14
-
85
84.9
75.9
75.0
17.5
0
85 To 83
85.1
77.4
78.0
Beginning of treatment
22.5
5
83
83.2
77.5
78.6
32.5
15
82
81.9
76.9
78.4
a sample
47.5
30
81
80.9
77.4
78.3
a sample
57.5
40
80.5
80.6
77.5
78.1
62.5
45
80.5
80.7
77.4
78.2
a sample
69.5
52
80.5
80.4
77.5
78.2
Minimal adhesion
77.5
60
80.5
80.6
77.6
78.3
Sample, adhesion
87.5
70
-
-
-
-
Add 0.3 g of magnesium stearate
92.5
75
80.0
79.8
77.1
78.1
Sample, continued adhesion, rapid improvement in tablet flow by adding magnesium stearate
107.5
90
80.0
79.9
77.5
78.0
Sample, cooling start
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 18-1-2
Example No. 18-1 (6.3 kg batch)
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=12
Compressive force (kN)
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
250
Thickness (mm)
4.08
Breaking strength (Newton)
87
Example No. 18-1, where treatment is at 72°C
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
60-minute treatment
n=3
n=3
n=2
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Without yay
One hour
25
26
25
Two hours
40
40
40
4 hours
66
64
62
8 hours
95
89
91
12 hour
102
97
92
Example No. 18-1 (5.0 kg batch)
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=25
Compressive force (kN)
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
253
Thickness (mm)
4.13
Breaking strength (Newton)
92
Example No. 18-1, where treatment is at 75°C
Example No. 18-1, where treatment is at 78°C
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
Processing for 60 minutes
Process for 30 minutes
n=3
n=3
n=3
n=3
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Without yay
One hour
26
26
26
26
Two hours
40
41
42
41
4 hours
63
67
68
66
8 hours
90
94
94
93
12 hour
101
101
100
101
Table No. 18-2-1
The curing process at a temperature of 72 ° C in Example No. 18-2
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
42 To 80
41.9
37.4
37.8
Bowl load 1.975 kg; Heating start
10
-
80
80.0
68.0
68.6
18
0
80
80.1
71.6
72.0
Beginning of treatment
28
10
75
74.5
70.7
72.4
33
15
75 To 22
75.0
71.1
72.3
End of processing, beginning of cooling
47.5
-
22
22.5
30.4
30.0
End of cooling, sample, prepare for packaging
Apply a 3% film coating to the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
50 To 80
50
48.0
43.0
Heating starter for further processing
12
0
80 To 77
80.0
72.1
72.0
Beginning of further processing
27
15
75
74.9
71.0
72.4
Sample 15 minutes of additional processing
42
30
74 To 22
73.9
70.7
72.1
Sample 30 minutes of further processing, start of cooling
61
-
22
-
-
30
End of cooling, take out tablets, sample
The curing process at a temperature of 75 °C in Example No. 18-2
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
42 To 82
41.8
39.7
40.1
Bowl load 1.975 kg; Heating start
13
-
82
82
73.0
72.2
18
0
82 To 80
81.9
75.2
75.0
Beginning of treatment
33
15
78 To 22
77.8
74.2
75.4
End of curing, beginning of cooling, no adhesion
49
-
22
22.5
28.8
29.5
End of cooling, sample, prepare for packaging
Apply a 3% film coating to the tablets, and begin heating as soon as this is achieved
0
-
48 To 83
48.0
44.5
41.5
Heating starter for further processing
13
0
83
83.3
75.6
75.4
Beginning of further processing
28
15
78
78.0
74.6
75.4
Sample 15 minutes of additional processing
44.5
31.5
77.5 to 22
77.4
74.4
75.4
Sample 30 minutes of further processing, start of cooling
58.5
-
22
24.2
-
30
End of cooling, take out tablets, sample
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 18-2-2
Example No. 18.2
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=10
n=10
n=10
Tool size, round (2.54 cm)
3/8
3/8
13/32
Compressive force (kN)
8
15
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
253
253
252
Thickness (mm)
4.24
4.21
3.77
Breaking strength (Newton)
50
68
55
Example No. 18-2, where treatment is at 72°C
Compressive force (kN)
8
15
15
Process for 15 minutes, coated
Process for 15 minutes, coated
Process for 15 minutes, coated
n=3
n=6
n=3
n=6
n=3
Thawing basket*
No yay
There yay
No yay
There yay
No yay
There yay
Dissolution 1 (what was released %)
SGF
One hour
22 (4.9)
23 (6.5)
22 (4.8)
24 (5.6)
23 (2.2)
Two hours
36 (6.1)
38 (5.4)
36 (6.7)
39 (4.4)
37 (3.9)
4 hours
58 (5.8)
63 (2.3)
58 (7.0)
63 (2.3)
59 (5.2)
6 hours
75 (4.9)
80 (1.2)
75 (4.9)
80 (1.6)
76 (4.2)
8 hours
87 (4.1)
90 (1.2)
88 (3.1)
90 (1.8)
88 (3.2)
12 hour
96 (1.9)
99 (0.8)
97 (1.2)
98 (1.6)
97 (1.1)
16 hour
-
100 (1.4)
-
101 (2.8)
-
* Some tests included the use of a retaining spring at the top of the basket to reduce the ability of the disc to stick to the base shaft; 1 The values in parentheses indicate the relative standard deviation.
Table No. 18-3-1
The curing process at a temperature of 72 °C in Example No. 18-3
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
22 To 80
25.1
29.4
30.1
Pot load 2.0kg, heating start
10
-
80
80.2
68.3
68.0
19
0
80
80.0
71.8
72.0
Beginning of treatment
24
5
76
75.7
71.2
72.5
29
10
76 To 75
76.0
71.3
72.7
34
15
75 To 22
74.9
70.7
72.2
End of processing, beginning of cooling
49
-
22
22.9
29.1
29.7
End of cooling
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 18-3-2
Example No. 18-3
The untreated inner parts of the discs
Tools
3/8" round
Oval 1.524 cm x 0.6858
Compressive force (kN)
15
10 - 11
N=5
n=5
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
250
250
Thickness (mm)
4.20
3.80 3.84
Breaking strength (Newton)
83 - 110
71 - 76
Example No. 18-3, where treatment is at 72°C
Process for 15 minutes, coated
Process for 15 minutes, coated
3/8" round
Oval 1.524 cm x 0.6858
N=6
n=6
n=6
* Thawing basket
No yay
There yay
No yay
Dissolution 1 (what was released)
SGF%
One hour
23 (7.0)
23 (4.9)
24 (7.2)
Two hours
37 (6.2)
38 (3.4)
40 (6.0)
4 hours
59 (4.6)
61 (1.9)
64 (5.0)
6 hours
75 (3.5)
79 (1.5)
81 (2.8)
8 hours
87 (2.7)
89 (2.1)
91 (2.0)
12 hour
98 (2.6)
98 (2.6)
98 (1.6)
* Some tests included the use of a retaining spring at the top of the basket to reduce the ability of the disc to stick to the base shaft;
1 The values in parentheses indicate the relative standard deviation.
Table No. 18-4-1
The treatment process at 72°C in Example No. 18-4
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
82
35.6
37.3
36.3
Bowl loading 2.0kg; Heating start
8
-
82
82
69.8
68.8
13.5
0
82
82
72.6
72.0
Beginning of treatment
18.5
5
80 To 79
79.6
72.0
73.5
23.5
10
76
75.9
71.4
73.0
28.5
15
75
75
70.9
72.4
a sample
38.5
25
75
74.9
70.9
72.5
43.5
30
75
75
71.1
72.6
a sample
51.5
38
75
75.1
71.4
72.7
58.5
45
75
75
71.4
72.8
a sample
68.5
55
75
75.2
71.6
73.0
73.5
60
75
75
71.5
73
End of processing, sample, beginning of cooling
78.5
-
23
37.4
48
52.2
Continue to cool
The treatment process at 75°C in Example No. 18-4
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
85
26.1
31.0
29.1
Bowl loading 2.0kg; Heating start
5
-
82
73.8
61.9
61.1
11
-
82
79.9
69.3
68.3
17.5
0
85
85
76.2
75
Beginning of treatment
27.5
10
78
77.8
74.4
76.1
32.5
15
78
77.9
74.5
75.9
a sample
39.5
22
77.55
77.4
74.1
75.6
47.5
30
77.5
77.4
74.2
75.6
a sample
55.5
38
77
76.9
74.0
75.4
62.5
45
77
77
73.9
75.3
a sample
69.5
52
77
77.2
73.8
75.3
77.5
60
77
77.0
73.7
75.3
End of processing, sample, beginning of cooling
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 18-4-2
Example No. 18-4
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=25
Compressive force (kN)
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
254
Thickness (mm)
4.15
Breaking strength (Newton)
85
Example No. 18-4, where treatment is at 72°C
Example No. 18-4, where the treatment is at 75°C
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
60-minute treatment
Process for 15 minutes
60-minute treatment
n=3
n=3
n=3
n=3
n=3
Dissolution 1 (what was released)
SGF%
No yay
One hour
26
26
26
26
25
Two hours
41
41
41
42
40
4 hours
63
64
65
65
64
8 hours
89
89
94
91
89
12 hour
98
99
100
100
99
Example No. 18-4, stability after two weeks, curing for 15 minutes at 72°C
Principled
25/160
40/175
50 M
n=3
n=4
n=4
N=4
Dissolution 1 (what was released %)
SGF
There is no yay,
One hour
26
26
26
27
Two hours
41
40
41
42
4 hours
64
62
63
65
6 hours
-
-
-
-
8 hours
89
88
90
92
12 hour
99
99
99
102
Example No. 18-4, stability after two weeks, curing for 15 minutes at 75°C
Principled
25/160
40/175
50 M
N=3
n=4
n=4
n=4
Dissolution 1 (What was released) %SGF No yay,
One hour
26
25
26
25
Two hours
42
39
41
40
4 hours
65
60
64
63
6 hours
-
-
-
-
8 hours
91
84
90
91
12 hour
100
95
99
99
Example 18-4, stability after one month, curing for 15 minutes at 72°C
Principled
25/160
40/175
50 M
n=3
n=4
n=4
n=3
Dissolution 1 (what was released %) SGF
There is no yay,
One hour
26
26
26
26
Two hours
41
41
40
41
4 hours
64
63
63
66
6 hours
-
79
79
83
8 hours
89
89
91
93
12 hour
99
98
99
101
In Example 19, two different oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 80 mg of oxycodone HCl are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide with a tablet weight of 250 mg. One formulation (Example 19-1) contained polyethylene oxide N60K and the other (Example 19-2) contained polyethylene oxide N60K.
Installations:
Example No. 19-1
Example No. 19-2
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
80 (32٪)
80 (32٪)
polyethylene oxide (MW: approx. 2,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- N60K)
168.75 (67.5٪)
0
polyethylene oxide (MW: approx. 1,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- N12K)
0
168.75 (67.5٪)
magnesium stearate
1.25 (0.5٪)
1.25 (0.5٪)
Total weight of the inner part of the disc (mg)
250
250
0
Total batch weight
2.0
2.0
0
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
10
10
Total tablet weight (mg)
260
260
Packaging batch size
1.4
1.4
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The Patterson Kelly V mixer (it has an I-shaped shaft) 8 quart was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 of polyethylene oxide oxycodone hydrochloride
remaining polyethylene oxide
Note: Polyethylene oxide was filtered through an 841 micron mesh, no retain material was used.
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 5 minutes with the I-shaped column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer.
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the I bar condensing column turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag.
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet press at 30,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools. The specific elements of stress are shown in Tables 19-1 and 19-4.
7- Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 18-inch Compu-Lab coating pan.
8- A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed in the bowl directly above the layer of discs so that the probe tip was near the layer of moving discs.
9- The tablet bed was heated by adjusting the inlet temperature to reach a target exhaust temperature of 72°C. The curing starting point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the target exhaust temperature was reached. Once the target exhaust temperature was reached, the inlet temperature was adjusted as required to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were processed for 15 minutes. After curing, the inlet temperature was set to 22 °C and the tablet layer was cooled. The temperature values for the curing operations of Examples 19-1 and 19-2 are shown in Tables 19-1-1 and 19-2-1.
10- After cooling, the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 53°C. Film coating was started once the exhaust temperature reached approximately 41°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
11- After completing the film coating, the tablet layer was cooled by setting the inlet temperature to 22°C. The tablet layer was cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30°C or less.
12- The discs have been removed.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests as follows:
Tablet cores (untreated), treated tablets, and treated/coated tablets were tested in vitro using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket with retention spring positioned on top of the basket to reduce susceptibility of the tablet to the shaft base) at 100 rpm in 900 ml of gastric fluid Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (pH pH 3.0) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0,8.0,12.0 and 16 hours.
The uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test with a maximum force of 196 Newtons using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate the breakage resistance of the tablets.
The dimensions of the tablets and their dissolution results are shown in Tables 19-1-2 and 19-2-2.
Table No. 19-1-1
Example 19-1 (PEO N60K)
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
22 To 80
25.3
26.4
26.9
Bowl loading 2.0kg; Heating start
21
0
80
79.9
70.0 *
72.0
Beginning of treatment
31
10
75.5
75.5
69.1 *
72.2
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
36
15
75.5 to 22
75.4
69.5 *
72.4
End of processing, beginning of cooling
50
-
22
22.6
27.5
30.0
End of cooling, sample
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured with temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust. * Low temperature values compared to exhaust temperature. Changing the reactor group before treatment in Example No. 19-2.
Table No. 19-1-2
Example 19-1 (PEO N60K)
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=15
Compressive force (kN)
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
252
Thickness (mm)
4.12
Breaking strength (Newton)
112
Example No. 19-1, where the treatment is at 72°C
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
Processed/coated
n=3
n=3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Basket with yay,
One hour
25 (2.3)
25 (2.1)
25 (3.7)
Two hours
40 (1.8)
40 (1.3)
40 (3.8)
4 hours
67 (0.7)
66 (1.5)
65 (1.4)
6 hours
85 (1.0)
86 (3.9)
84 (1.0)
8 hours
97 (0.8)
98 (1.8)
95 (0.7)
12 hour
101(1.2)
103 (1.2)
102 (0.8)
16 hour
102 (0.7)
103 (2.0)
103 (1.1)
Table No. 19-2-1
Example 19-2 (PEO N12K)
temperature
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Designated inlet temperature (°C)
Actual inlet temperature (°C)2
Probe temperature (°C)3
Exhaust temperature (°C)4
comments
0
-
22 To 80
27.0
31.4
30.9
Bowl load 1.4kg; Heating start
19.5
0
80
80.1
71.5
72.0
Beginning of treatment
24.5
5
77
76.7
71.0
72.8
29.5
10
75
75.0
70.3
72.0
Good flow of tablets, no sticking
34.5
15
75 To 22
75.1
70.4
72.0
End of processing, beginning of cooling
49
-
22
22.4
30.0
30.0
End of cooling, sample
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured using temperature probe (wire thermocouple), 4 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 19-2-2
Example 19-1 (PEO N12K)
The untreated inner parts of the discs
n=15
Compressive force (kN)
15
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
257
Thickness (mm)
4.17
Breaking strength (Newton)
107
Example No. 19-2, where the treatment is at 72°C
Untreated
Process for 15 minutes
Processed/coated
n=3
n=3
n=6
Dissolution (what was released%)
SGF
Basket with yay,
One hour
277 (7.6)
25 (1.0)
26 (4.0)
Two hours
44 (4.9)
42 (0.6)
43 (3.7)
4 hours
72 (2.5)
70 (0.6)
71 (1.8)
6 hours
92 (1.1)
92 (0.6)
91 (1.2)
8 hours
102 (0.9)
101 (1.1)
100 (1.4)
12 hour
102 (1.1)
101 (0.9)
101 (1.3)
16 hour
103 (0.3)
103 (1.3)
102 (1.1)
Example No. 20: Indentation test:
In Example 20, the discs corresponding to Examples 13-1 to 13-5, 14-1 to 14-5, 16-1, 16-2, 17-1 and 18-2 are subjected to a notch test using a texture analyzer to determine the disc resistance.
Notching tests were performed using:
TA-XT2 Texture Analyzer (Texture Technologies Corp., 18 Fairview Road, Scarsdale, NY 10583).
Supplied with a 1"/8" diameter TA-8A stainless steel ball probe. The probe height was calibrated to 6 mm on a stainless steel stand with a gently concave surface. The discs were placed on the stainless steel stand and aligned directly under the probe.
Each type of disc has been tested at least once. Single measurement values are recorded. Testing the same type of disc produced identical results unless the disc and probe were misaligned. In such a case, the data is rejected from confirmation by visual examination of the disk being tested.
Tests were performed based on the following specific elements:
Speed before test 0.5mm/s,
Speed during testing 0.5 mm/s,
Automatic release force 10g,
Post-test speed 1.0mm/s,
Dimension during testing 3.0 mm.
The results are shown in Tables 20-1 to 20-3 and Figures 20 to 33.
Table No. 20-1
Evaluate the force required to cause a crack (depth of penetration required to cause a crack), distance, and work
Lissing test results
Force required to cause a crack (Newton)
Maximum force (Newton)6
Distance(mm)7
Work
(Joule)8
Example No. 13-1 1
-
189
3.00
0.284
Example No. 13-2 1
-
188
3.00
0.282
Example No. 13-3 1
191
-
2.91
0.278
Example No. 13-4 1
132
-
1.81
0.119
Example No. 13-5 1
167
-
1.82
0.152
Example No. 17-1 2
> 250 5
-
> 2.0
> 0.250
Example No. 18-2 2
194
-
1.80
0.175
Example No. 14-1 3
213
-
2.52
0.268
Example No. 14-2 3
196
-
2.27
0.222
Example No. 14-3 3
161
-
1.90
0.153
Example No. 14-4 3
137
-
1.51
0.103
Example No. 14-5 3
134
-
1.39
0.093
Example No. 16-1 4
227
-
2.23
0.253
Example No. 16-2 4
224
-
2.17
0.243
1The indentation test was performed on uncoated, 30-minute treated tablets. The treatment time was determined according to Method 4, and treatment began when the probe temperature reached 70°C, see Example No. 13).
2 The indentation test was performed on the tablets treated at 72°C for 15 minutes and coated (the curing time was determined according to Method 2, and treatment began when the exhaust temperature reached 72°C, see Examples 17, 18).
3 Cracking test performed on tablets cured for one hour and coated (curing time was determined according to Method 1, and curing began when the inlet air temperature reached 75°C, see Example 14),
4 Scoring test performed on 15-minute cured and coated tablets (curing time was determined according to Method 2, and curing began when the exhaust air temperature reached 72°C, see Example 16),
5 The maximum force value exceeded the detection limit, 6 In cracking tests in which the tablets did not crack under the conditions described above, the maximum force value at a penetration depth of 3.0 mm is given instead of the cracking force;
7 The distance associated with the “depth of penetration needed to cause a crack” 8 is an approximate value, which is calculated using the equation: Work ≈ 1/2. Force [Newtons] x Distance [m].
Table No. 20-2
Selective values of force in 0.1 mm distance increments
Distance(mm)
force (newton)
Example
13-1
Example
13-2
Example
13-3
Example
13-4
Example
13-5
Example
17-1
Example
18-2
0.0
0.18
0.18
0.15
0.17
0.24
0.14
0.35
0.1
3.54
4.86
3.67
4.38
5.35
6.12
6.88
0.2
8.76
10.56
9.95
10.29
12.37
15.13
15.51
0.3
15.49
16.97
16.85
17.62
22.22
25.57
25.33
0.4
22.85
24.19
23.81
25.44
32.98
35.86
35.21
0.5
30.43
31.59
30.81
33.42
43.85
46.10
45.25
0.6
37.80
38.82
38.42
41.49
55.41
56.87
55.60
0.7
45.61
46.10
46.61
49.73
67.02
67.69
66.85
0.8
53.30
53.08
54.53
58.37
78.43
78.71
78.24
0.9
60.67
60.25
62.38
67.00
89.60
90.74
89.60
1.0
68.02
67.55
70.89
75.45
100.38
103.18
101.69
1.1
75.29
74.67
80.12
83.75
110.46
116.10
114.50
1.2
82.81
81.40
89.03
91.14
119.87
129.90
127.13
1.3
90.04
88.23
97.49
98.35
129.16
144.28
139.46
1.4
96.85
95.21
105.89
105.88
138.29
158.94
151.41
1.5
103.92
101.84
114.37
112.94
146.76
173.41
162.88
1.6
111.30
108.30
122.31
119.59
154.61
188.13
173.95
1.7
118.27
115.16
129.99
125.85
161.87
202.39
184.52
1.8
125.02
121.81
136.94
131.63
167.65
216.08
193.31
1.9
131.71
128.37
143.45
137.30
165.05
229.06
190.80
2.0
138.09
134.64
149.56
142.86
163.03
241.23
191.16
2.1
144.38
140.46
155.52
148.05
165.82
1250.17
192.11
2.2
150.54
146.46
160.93
153.34
168.86
-
191.84
2.3
156.18
152.31
166.39
158.55
171.13
-
189.31
2.4
161.57
157.73
171.41
163.52
172.21
-
185.17
2.5
166.80
163.24
176.29
168.34
171.66
-
179.55
2.6
171.67
168.53
180.67
172.34
169.90
-
173.09
2.7
176.24
173.45
184.52
175.57
167.51
-
166.68
2.8
180.39
178.37
187.79
177.84
164.67
-
158.70
2.9
184.61
183.24
190.54
180.35
161.12
-
148.39
3.0
188.65
187.97
192.92
182.88
156.21
-
137.65
1 The force value at a distance of 2.0825 mm
Table No. 20-3
Selective values of force in 0.1 mm distance increments
distance
(millimeter)
force (newton)
Example
14-1
Example
14-2
Example
14-3
Example
14-4
Example
14-5
Example
16-1
Example
16-2
0.0
0.33
0.27
0.33
0.31
0.41
0.27
0.26
0.1
6.06
6.03
6.55
6.61
5.78
6.22
7.25
0.2
13.81
13.05
13.65
15.53
13.51
13.88
15.52
0.3
22.48
21.42
21.55
24.82
21.87
23.31
25.11
0.4
31.41
29.68
29.51
34.09
31.12
33.72
35.29
0.5
40.00
37.79
37.99
43.44
41.26
43.82
45.31
0.6
48.85
46.69
47.69
52.78
52.22
54.19
55.47
0.7
57.85
55.26
57.19
62.09
63.53
64.60
66.58
0.8
66.76
64.45
66.87
71.64
74.72
75.69
78.37
0.9
75.69
73.68
76.43
81.47
85.73
87.70
90.38
1.0
84.63
83.33
86.31
91.14
96.72
99.88
103.07
1.1
94.04
92.81
95.86
100.28
107.27
112.14
116.67
1.2
103.45
101.93
105.14
109.77
118.11
124.54
130.10
1.3
112.69
111.76
115.04
119.97
128.22
137.12
143.13
1.4
122.63
122.04
125.05
129.55
133.77
149.34
155.78
1.5
132.50
132.04
134.14
137.20
134.95
161.51
168.25
1.6
141.98
141.82
142.58
135.04
139.81
173.01
180.44
1.7
151.21
150.82
150.69
139.12
144.84
184.28
192.28
1.8
160.27
159.44
157.82
143.60
148.83
194.58
203.45
1.9
169.02
168.09
161.72
146.81
151.39
204.27
212.71
2.0
177.84
176.40
162.87
148.59
152.52
213.25
218.71
2.1
186.18
184.67
165.88
149.32
152.56
221.06
223.17
2.2
194.39
192.38
169.78
149.19
151.29
226.97
224.84
2.3
202.16
196.66
173.59
148.16
147.83
219.64
226.60
2.4
208.46
199.43
176.38
146.05
141.54
210.57
228.33
2.5
212.94
202.98
178.44
142.81
134.06
203.85
228.97
2.6
213.83
206.77
179.87
137.70
124.24
197.33
228.49
2.7
216.58
209.46
181.13
131.34
109.53
189.49
227.40
2.8
219.71
211.32
182.02
123.72
88.60
181.26
225.10
2.9
222.51
211.01
181.70
114.09
20.86
174.45
222.87
3.0
224.59
208.85
179.91
102.93
0.16
168.70
220.36
Example No. 21: Indentation test:
In Example 21, the tablets corresponding to Examples 16-1 (60 mg oxycodone HCl) and 16-2 (80 mg oxycodone HCl) and the commercial Oxycontintm 60 mg and Oxycontintm 80 mg tablets were subjected to an indentation test using a texture analyzer to determine the tablet resistance.
Grooving tests were performed as described in Example 20.
The results are shown in Table 21 and Figures 34 and 35.
distance
(millimeter)
force (newton)
Example No. 16-1
OxycontinTM60 mg
Example No. 16-2
OxycontinTM 80 mg
0.0
0.27
0.42
0.26
0.42
0.1
6.22
14.14
7.25
14.21
0.2
13.88
30.39
15.52
29.75
0.3
23.31
46.53
25.11
44.30
0.4
33.72
61.94
35.29
59.46
0.5
43.82
78.14
45.31
75.33
0.6
54.19
13.58
55.47
91.91
0.7
64.60
0.30
66.58
108.71
0.8
75.69
0.09
78.37
1.48
0.9
87.70
0.00
90.38
1.52
1.0
99.88
0.01
103.07
1.17
1.1
112.14
0.01
116.67
1.31
1.2
124.54
0.00
130.10
3.61
1.3
137.12
0.01
143.13
7.85
1.4
149.34
0.00
155.78
3.49
1.5
161.51
0.00
168.25
0.15
1.6
173.01
0.00
180.44
0.85
1.7
184.28
0.00
192.28
1.46
1.8
194.58
0.00
203.45
1.12
1.9
204.27
0.00
212.71
0.81
2.0
213.25
0.02
218.71
0.52
2.1
221.06
-0.01
223.17
0.14
2.2
226.97
-0.01
224.84
0.13
2.3
219.64
-0.01
226.60
0.10
2.4
210.57
0.01
228.33
0.09
2.5
203.85
0.00
228.97
0.08
2.6
197.33
0.00
228.49
0.08
2.7
189.49
-0.01
227.40
0.07
2.8
181.26
0.00
225.10
0.08
2.9
174.45
0.00
222.87
0.07
3.0
168.70
0.00
220.36
0.08
In Comparative Example 22, five 150 mg tablet formulations (Examples 22-1 through 22-5) containing 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg of oxycodone HCl are prepared using the compositions as described in Example 13, and modifying the manufacturing process. Followed by Example No. 13, where the tablets are subjected to a forming step instead of a processing step.
Installations:
Example
22-1
Example
22-2
Example
22-3
Example
22-4
Example
22-5
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
10
15
20
30
40
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5
magnesium stearate
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Total weight of the inside of the tablets (mg)
150
150
150
150
150
Total batch size
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The 16 quart Patterson Kelly V mixer (I-shaped shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately 1/2 of polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride
remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
2- The materials of step 1 were mixed for 5 minutes with the condensation column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into a V mixer.
4- Step 3 materials were mixed for one minute with the condensation column turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag.
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet press at a speed of 35,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools.
7- Step 6 tablets are formed using a temperature-controlled specac press. The CDs were placed in step 6 between two heated plates that were preheated to 120 °C and then compressed under 1000 kgf pressure and held for 3 minutes. The molten cooling tablets were cooled to room temperature before density measurement.
Densitometry was performed as follows:
The density of tablets was determined before and after the shaping step by the archimedes principle, using a top-loading Mettler Toledo balance model #AB 135-S/FACT, serial number #1127430072 and 33360 density determination tools, according to the following procedure:
1- Set up the mettler toledo scale with density determination tools.
2- Fill a cup of appropriate size (200 ml) with hexane.
3- The weight of the disc in the air is considered weight A.
4- Transfer the same disk to the lower coil of the beaker filled with hexane.
5- Determine the weight of the tablet in hexane and record the weight as weight B.
6- Calculate density according to the equation.
<img file="SA2709B1_D0004.tif" />
, where :
ρ: disk density.
A: The weight of the disc in the air.
B: Weight of the tablet when immersed in liquid.
ρ0: density of the liquid at a given temperature (density of hexane at 20°C = 0.660 g/ml (Merck Index).
7- Density recording.
The density values reported are the average values for three tablets and all refer to uncoated tablets.
The results are shown in Table 22.1.
Table No. 22-1
Density (g/cm3)1
Density change after shaping (%)3
Unformed disc 2
Problem disk
Example No. 22-1
1.172
1.213
+ 3.498
Example No. 22-2
1.174
1.213
+ 3.322
Example No. 22-3
1.179
1.222
+ 3.647
Example No. 22-4
1.182
1.231
+ 4.146
Example No. 22-5
1.222
1.237
+ 1.227
1 The density value is the average value of three density values; 2 The density of the “unmolded tablet” corresponds to the density of the “uncured tablet”.
In Examples 13-1 to 13-5; 3 The density change after forming corresponds to the density change observed in % of formed tablets compared to unformed tablets.
In Example 23, 154.5 mg tablets containing 30 mg hydromorphone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. Composition:
mg/unit
EGP/Batch
Hydromorphone HCl
30
1000
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
119.25
3975
magnesium stearate
0.75
25
Total weight of the inner part of the disc (mg)
150
Total batch size
10 kg (2 5 kg)
Encapsulation
mg/unit
Opadry film packaging
4.5
Total tablet weight (mg)
154.5
Packaging batch size (kg)
8.835 kg
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The PK V mixer (it has an I-shaped shaft) 16 quart was filled in the following order:
Approximately half of polyethylene oxide 301 hydromorphone HCl
remaining polyethylene oxide 301
Note: Polyethylene oxide was filtered through an 841 micron mesh, no retain material was used.
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for 5 minutes with the condensation column running.
3- The magnesium stearate was filled into the PK V mixer.
4- The materials of step 3 were mixed for one minute with the condensation condenser turned off.
5- The Step 4 mixture was packed in a plastic bag.
(Note: Two 5kg mixtures were obtained to provide 10kg available for pressing).
6- The Step 5 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet rotary tablet press using standard round concave (embossed) tools at a speed of 35,000 tablets per hour using a compression force of 5-8 kN.
7- Step 6 tablets were loaded into a coating pan compu-lab with a container load of 9.068 kg.
8- The bowl speed was set to 10 rpm and the disc layer was heated by adjusting the inlet air temperature to reach a target exhaust temperature of 72°C. The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached 72°C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 1 hour. Tablets were sampled 30 minutes after treatment.
9- After one hour of treatment at the target exhaust temperature of 72°C, the inlet temperature was set to 90°C to increase the exhaust temperature (bed temperature).
10- After 10 minutes of increased heating, the exhaust temperature reached 82°C. Good flow/movement of the discs continued.
11- The inlet temperature was set to 22°C to start cooling. During the cooling period (to an exhaust temperature of 42°C), no sticking or agglomeration of the tablets was observed.
12- The Step 11 tablets were loaded into a 60.96 cm coating pan compu-lab with a load of 8.835 kg.
13- The tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 55 degrees Celsius. Film coating was initiated as soon as the exhaust temperature approached 42 °C and continued until a weight gain of 3% was achieved.
14- Film coating was performed at a spray rate of 40 to 45 g/min, an airflow target of 9.91 cm3 per minute, and the pan speed was started at 10 rpm and increased to 15 rpm. After encapsulation was completed, the bowl speed was set to 3.5 rpm and the tablets were allowed to cool.
15- The discs have been removed.
In vitro testing including dissolution tests, evaluation, and content uniformity were performed as follows: 30-minute cured tablets (uncoated) were tested in the laboratory using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of liquid Simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (No. pH 3.0) with UV detection at 220 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, and 12.0 hours. The 30-minute treated tablets (uncoated) were subjected to an assay test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two batches of 10 tablets each with 900 ml of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile from simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) under continuous magnetic stirring in a 1000 ml standard volume vial until all tablets were dispersed. Completely or all night. Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate at pH pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm. The 30-minute cured tablets (uncoated) were subjected to a content uniformity test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from ten separate 90 ml tablets of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) under continuous magnetic stirring in a 100 ml standard volume vial until all tablets were completely dispersed or overnight. . Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column held at 60 °C using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and buffer solution. Of potassium phosphate monobasic at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The results are shown in Table 23.
Example No. 23
Process for 30 minutes
Evaluation
(oxycodone HCl%)1
98.9
Content homogeneity
(% oxycodone HCl)
97.9
4
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
hour
26
Two hours
42
4 hours
66
8 hours
92
12 hour
101
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl
In Example 24, 150 mg tablets containing 2 mg hydromorphone HCl are prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide.
Composition:
mg/unit
EGP/Batch
Hydromorphone HCl
2
66.5
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
147.25
4908.5
magnesium stearate
0.75
25
Total weight of the inner part of the disc (mg)
150
Total batch size
10 kg (2 5 kg)
The processing steps to manufacture the tablets were as follows:
1- The PK V mixer (equipped with a condensing shaft) 4 quart was filled in the following order:
600 Approximately 1 g of polyethylene oxide 301 Hydromorphone HCl
600 Approximately 1 g of polyethylene oxide 301
2- Step 1 materials were mixed for two minutes with the condensation column running and then removed.
3- The 16 quart PK V mixer (equipped with condensing shaft) was filled in the following order:
Approximately half of the remaining polyethylene oxide 301
Premixed materials (in step 2)
remaining polyethylene oxide 301.
4- The materials of step 3 were mixed for 5 minutes with the condensation column running.
5- Magnesium stearate was filled into the PK V mixer.
6- Step 5 materials were mixed for one minute with the condensation column turned off.
7- The Step 6 mixture was packed in a plastic bag (Note: Two 5kg mixtures were obtained to provide 10kg available for pressing)
8- The Step 7 mixture was compressed to the target weight using an 8-tablet rotary tablet press using 1.27 cm standard round concave (embossed) tools at a speed of 40,800 tablets per hour using a compression force of 2 kN.
9- Step 8 tablets were loaded into a 24-inch Compu-Lab coating pan with a load of 9.146 kg.
10- The pan speed was set to 10 revolutions per minute, and the layer of discs was heated by adjusting the inlet air temperature to reach an exhaust temperature of approximately 72 °C. The treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached 72 °C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 1 h. Tablets were sampled 30 minutes after treatment.
11- The pan speed was increased to 15 rpm once the exhaust temperature reached 72°C.
12- After one hour of treatment at the target exhaust temperature, the inlet temperature was set to 22°C to start cooling. After 3 minutes of cooling, the layer of tablets collected, forming huge clusters of tablets. Packaging was not possible.
13 The discs have been ejected.
It is assumed that clumping of tablets can be prevented, for example by increasing bowl speed, using magnesium stearate as an anti-tacking agent, or by applying an undercoat before processing.
Testing was performed in the laboratory including dissolution tests, evaluation and content homogeneity as follows:
The 30-minute cured tablets (uncoated) were tested in vitro using a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a buffer solution of monobasic potassium phosphate (pH 3.0). ) with UV detection at 220 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
The 30-minute cured tablets (uncoated) were subjected to an evaluation test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two lots of 10 tablets of 900 ml each of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile from simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes under continuous magnetic stirring in a 1000 ml standard volume vial until Disperse all tablets completely or overnight. Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column held at 60 °C using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and buffer solution. Of potassium phosphate monobasic at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The 30-minute cured tablets (uncoated) were subjected to a content uniformity test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from ten separate 90 ml tablets of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) under continuous magnetic stirring in a 100 ml standard volume vial until all tablets were completely dispersed or overnight. . Sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 250 mm, 5 μm column held at 60 °C using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and buffer solution. of monobasic potassium phosphate at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The results are shown in Table 24.
Example No. 24
Process for 30 minutes
Evaluation
(oxycodone HCl%)1
95.7
Content homogeneity
(% oxycodone HCl)1
94.9
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
(n=6)
hour
26
Two hours
39
4 hours
62
8 hours
89
12 hour
98
1 As for what is written on the label for oxycodone HCl
Example No. 25
In Example 25, two different 400 mg tablet formulations containing 60 mg (Examples 25-1 and 25-2) and 80 mg (Examples 25-3 and 25-4) of oxycodone HCl are prepared using different high molecular weight polyethylene oxide and polyethylene oxide of low molecular weight. Two 100 kg batches were prepared for each formulation.
Example No. 25
mg/unit
mg/unit
oxycodone HCl
60
80
polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately 4,000,000; PolyoxTM WSR- 301)
229.7
216
polyethylene oxide (MW: approx. 1,00,000; PolyoxTM WSR- N10)
106.3
100
magnesium stearate
4
4
Total weight of the inner part of the disc (mg)
400
400
Example No
25-1
25-2
25-3
25-4
Total batch size
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
Encapsulation
mg/unit
mg/unit
Packaging with opadry film
16
16
Total tablet weight (mg)
416
416
Example
25-1
25-2
25-3
25-4
Packaging batch size (kg)
91.440
96.307
95.568
98.924
1- The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco Sifter screen equipped with an 841 micron mesh, into a separate suitable container.
2- The Gemco “V” mixer (with condensing shaft) 0.283 m3 was filled in the following order:
1/2 polyethylene oxide WSR 301 Oxycodone Hydrochloride approx
polyethylene oxide WSR N10
remaining polyethylene oxi de WSR 301
3- Step 2 materials were mixed for 10 minutes with the condensation column running.
4- The magnesium stearate was filled into a Gemco “V” mixer.
5- Step 4 materials were mixed for two minutes with the condensation column turned off.
6- The Step 5 mixture was filled in clean, tarred, stainless steel containers.
7- The Step 6 mixture was compressed to the target weight using a 40 tablet press at a speed of 124,000 tablets per hour using standard round concave (embossed) tools.
8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 42-inch accela-coat container with a load of 91.440 kg (Example 25-1), 96.307 kg (Example 25-2), 95.568 kg (Example 25-3), 98.924 kg (Example 25-3). No. 25-4).
9- The pan speed was set to a speed between 6 and 10 revolutions per minute, and the disc layer was heated by adjusting the exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 55°C. Film coating was started as soon as the exhaust temperature approached 40°C and continued for 10, 15 and 16 minutes. The initial film coat is done in this way to provide an 'overcoat' for the tablets to act as an anti-tacking agent during the curing process.
10- After the “top layer” was completed, the disc layer was heated by adjusting the exhaust temperature to reach an inlet temperature of 75°C (Example No. 25-1 and 25-3) or to reach a target exhaust temperature of 75°C (Example No. 25-2 and 25 -4). The tablets were cured at the target temperature for 65 minutes (Example 25-1), 52 minutes (Example 25-2), 80 minutes (Example 25-3), and 55 minutes (Example 25-4). For Examples 25-1 and Example 25-3, the curing starting point (as described in Method 1) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target inlet temperature. For Example 25-2 and Example 25-4, the treatment start point (as described in Method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target exhaust temperature. The temperature values for curing operations in Examples 25-1 through 25-4 are shown in Tables 25-1-1 through 25-4-1.
11- During the curing process, the pan speed was increased from 7 to 9 revolutions per minute (Examples 25-1 and 25-3) and from 10 to 12 revolutions per minute (Examples 25-2 and 25-4). For Examples 25-1 and 25-4, 20 mg of magnesium stearate is added as an anti-tacking agent. The tablet layer was cooled by setting the exhaust temperature to 30 °C.
12- After cooling, the tablet layer was heated by setting the inlet temperature to 53°C. Film coating was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached approximately 39°C and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
13- After completing the film coating, the tablet layer was cooled by setting the exhaust temperature to 27 ° C. The tablet layer is cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30°C or less.
14- The discs have been removed.
Tests were performed in the laboratory including breaking strength tests as follows:
Processed and coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL of simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) using a Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0 150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and a non-basic potassium phosphate buffer solution (pH 3.0) with UV detection at 230 nm. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
The untreated tablets were subjected to a fracture resistance test with a maximum force of 196 N using a Schleuniger 2E/106 device to evaluate the fracture resistance of the tablets.
The results are shown in Tables 25-1-2 to 25-4-2
Table No. 25-1-1: Temperatures in the curing process in Example No. 25-1
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature (°C)
Actual exhaust temperature (°C)3
Bowl speed (rpm)
comments
0
-
52
60
41
7
5
0
75
60
59
7
Beginning of treatment
15
10
81
65
66
7
25
20
85
68
70
7
35
30
73
71
70
9
45
40
75
72
72
9
55
50
75
72
72
9
65
60
74
72
72
9
70
65
75
72
72
9
End of treatment, add 20 g of magnesium stearate
71
-
74
30
72
9
Start of cooling
81
-
32
30
52
9
91
-
24
30
36
9
94
-
23
30
30
9
End of cooling
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 25-1-2
Example No. 25-1
Untreated
Processed, coated
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
401 (n = 120)
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
112 (n = 50)
-
Table No. 25-2-1: Temperatures in the curing process in Example No. 25-2
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature (°C)
Actual exhaust temperature (°C)3
Bowl speed (rpm)
comments
0
-
69
65
46
10
3
-
75
65
53
10
13
-
85
70
65
10
23
-
90
75
69
10
33
0
90
77
77
10
Beginning of treatment
43
10
78
77
75
10
53
20
79
77
77
10
63
30
81
77
77
10
73
40
80
77
77
12
83
50
79
77
77
12
85
52
80
77
77
12
End of treatment, add 20 g of magnesium stearate
86
-
80
30
77
12
Start of cooling
96
-
37
30
54
12
106
-
29
25
47
12
116
-
24
25
30
12
End of cooling
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 25-2-2
Example No. 25-2
Untreated
Processed, coated
Initial data
Processed, coated
Second test data
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
400
(n = 120)
-
-
Breaking strength(mm)
103
(n=40)
-
-
n=6
N=6
Dissolution
(What was launched %)
SGF
hour
-
23
24
Two hours
-
39
43
4 hours
-
62
70
6 hours
-
79
88
8 hours
-
90
99
12 hour
-
97
103
Table No. 25-3-1: Temperatures in the curing process in Example No. 25-3
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature (°C)
Actual exhaust temperature (°C)3
Bowl speed (rpm)
comments
0
-
55
65
39
7
5
0
75
65
58
7
Beginning of treatment
15
10
82
66
66
7
25
20
86
68
70
7
35
30
76
72
72
7
45
40
75
72
72
7
55
50
75
72
72
7
65
60
75
72
72
9
75
70
74
72
72
9
85
80
74
72
72
9
End of treatment, add 20 g of magnesium stearate
86
-
75
30
72
9
Start of cooling
96
-
33
30
53
9
106
-
26
30
39
9
112
-
23
30
30
9
End of cooling
1 Determined according to method 1, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 25-3-2
Example No. 25-3
Untreated
Processed, coated
Initial data
Processed, coated
Second test data
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
400
(n = 120)
-
-
Thickness (mm)
-
-
-
Diameter(mm)
-
-
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
111
(n=40)
-
-
Table No. 25-4-1: Temperatures in the curing process in Example No. 25-4
Total time
(minute)
Processing time (min)1
Inlet temperature (°C)2
Designated exhaust temperature (°C)
Actual exhaust temperature (°C)3
Bowl speed (rpm)
comments
0
-
60
70
43
10
10
-
80
75
64
10
20
-
85
75
69
10
30
-
88
76
74
10
33
0
88
78
78
10
Beginning of treatment
43
10
75
78
76
12
53
20
84
78
79
12
63
30
82
78
78
12
73
40
79
78
78
12
83
50
82
78
78
12
88
55
80
78
78
12
End of treatment, add 20 g of magnesium stearate
89
-
79
30
78
12
Start of cooling
99
-
38
25
54
12
109
-
26
25
45
12
113
-
23
25
34
12
Cooling end
1 Determined according to method 2, 2 temperature measured at inlet, 3 temperature measured at exhaust outlet.
Table No. 25-4-2
Example No. 25-4
Uncured
cured, coated
Initial data
cured, coated
2nd test data
Dimensions of discs
Weight(mg)
400
(n = 120)
-
-
Thickness (mm)
-
-
-
Diameter(mm)
-
-
-
Breaking strength (Newton)
101
(n=40)
-
-
n=6
n=6
Solubility (what was released %) SGF
hour
-
25
29
Two hours
-
42
47
4 hours
-
66
73
6 hours
-
84
91
8 hours
-
96
99
12 hours
-
100
101
Table No. 25-5
Density (g/cm3)1
Density change after processing (%)2
Untreated
Process for 30 minutes
60-minute treatment
Example No. 25-1
1.205
1.153
1.138
-5.560
Example No. 25-3
1.207
1.158
1.156
-4.225
1 Density was measured as shown for Example 13. The density value is the average value of three measured discs; 2The density change after treatment corresponds to the observed change in density in % tablets treated for 60 minutes compared to untreated tablets.
In Example 26, a single-dose, randomized controlled trial using four treatments, four periods, and four routes of administration in healthy human subjects was conducted to evaluate the pharmacokinetic profiles and relative bioavailability of three unsusceptible oxycodone formulations (10mg oxycodone tablets HCl of Examples 7-1 to 7-3 for the commercial OxyContin formulation (10 mg), both fasting and fed.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test processors:
* Treatment 1A: 1 single oxycodone HCl 10 mg tablet from Example 7-3 (Formula 1A) is given while fasting or taking food.
* Treatment 1B: One 10 mg oxycodone HCl tablet from Example 7-2 (Formula 1B) is given while fasting or taking food.
*Treatment 1C: One 10 mg oxycodone HCl tablet from Example 7-1 (Formula 1C) given while fasting or taking food.
reference treatment:
OC treatment: One 10 mg OxyContin tablet given in a fasted state or on food.
Both treatments were administered orally with 8 ounces (240 mL) of water as a single dose while fasting or taking food.
Because this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was given to minimize adverse effects associated with opioids.
Selection of treated individuals
Selection procedures
The following testing procedures were performed for all potential treated individuals at a selection visit within 28 days before the first dose was administered:
- Informed consent.
- Weight, height, body mass index (BMI), and demographic data.
- Evaluation of inclusion/exclusion criteria.
- Medical and treatment history, including concurrent treatment.
- Vital signs: blood pressure, respiratory rate, temperature measured orally, pulse rate (after sitting for approximately 5 minutes), blood pressure and pulse rate after sitting for approximately 2 minutes, and pulse oximetry (SPO2). ), including asking the person directly how they feel.
- Routine medical examination (may be performed alternatively at the beginning of the first period).
- Clinical laboratory evaluations (including biochemical evaluations, hematological evaluations, and urinalysis [UA]).
- Electrocardiogram (ECG) 12 leads.
Hepatitis tests (including hepatitis B surface antigen [HBsAg], hepatitis B surface antibody [HBsAb], hepatitis C antibody [ anti-HCV]), and selected drugs associated with addiction.
- Pregnancy test using serum (for treated females only).
- Serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) test (females who have reached menopause only).
Inclusion Criteria:
Males and females between the ages of 18 and 50 years, exclusively.
- Body weight between 50 and 100 kg and BMI18 and 34 (kg/m2).
- Healthy individuals who are free of significant abnormal findings based on medical history, physical examination, vital signs, and ECG.
For females who are able to become pregnant, they must use an adequate and reliable method of contraception (such as a barrier condom with foam or spermicide added, intra-uterine devices, and hormonal contraception). (Hormonal contraceptives alone are not permitted.) Females who have reached postmenopausal age must have reached this age within one year and their serum FSH must be high.
- The desire to eat all the food served while studying.
Exclusion criteria:
On the basis of the following criteria, potential individuals were excluded from the study.
- Pregnancy (positive result on a beta human chorionic gonadotropin test) or lactating in females.
- Any history related to drug abuse or alcohol for 5 years.
- History of recent conditions that could affect drug absorption, distribution, metabolism, or excretion.
- Use of opioid-containing medication in the past 30 days.
- History of known allergy to oxycodone, naltrexone or related compounds.
- Any history of nausea or recurrent vomiting (emesis), regardless of the etiology.
- Any history of seizures or traumatic head pain that has current consequences.
- Participation in a clinical drug study during the thirty days preceding the initial dose in this study.
- Any significant illness during the thirty days preceding the initial dose in this study.
- Use of any medication, including thyroid hormone replacement therapy (hormonal contraception permitted), vitamins, herbs, and/or mineral supplements, during the seven days prior to the initial dose.
- Refusing to abstain from food for 10 hours before giving the study drugs and 4 hours after giving them, and abstaining from caffeine or xanthine completely during each study period.
- Consuming alcoholic beverages within forty-eight (48) hours of the initial administration of the drug in the study (day one) or at any time following the initial administration of the drug in the study.
- History related to smoking or using nicotine products within 45 days of administration of the study drug. Positive result of a nicotine test in urine.
- Taking blood or its components during the thirty days preceding the administration of the study drugs or at any time during the study, except as required by this protocol.
- Positive results of urine drug screen, alcohol tests at the beginning of each period, and HBsAg, HBsAb (unless immunized), anti-HCV.
- Positive results of the Naloxone HCl test.
- The presence of Gilberts Syndrome or any hepatobiliary abnormalities.
- The examiner believes that the person is not suitable for a reason(s) not specifically stated in the exclusion criteria.
All individuals who met the inclusion criteria but did not meet any of the exclusion criteria were included in the study. It was expected that approximately 34 people would be included, with a target of 30 people to complete the study. Anyone who did not continue studying could be replaced.
Subjects were allocated through a random allocation schedule (RAS) in a 2:1 ratio with respect to fasted state or food intake, where 20 people were assigned to the fasted state and 10 people were assigned to the food intake state.
Procedures for entering the study:
On the first day of the first period, subjects were admitted to the study unit where they were administered a Naloxone HCl test. It was necessary for people to have negative test results in order to continue in the study. Vital signs and SPO2 were measured before and after the Naloxone HCl test.
The following procedures were also performed for all subjects at the beginning of each period: verification of inclusion criteria/exclusion criteria, including verification of willingness to adhere to caffeine or xanthine exclusion criteria.
Routine medical examination at the beginning of the first period only (if this is not done during screening).
Vital signs: blood pressure, respiratory rate, pulse rate (after sitting for about 5 minutes), and SPO2, including asking the person directly how they feel.
- Screening for alcohol (through a breathalyzer test), cotinine and selected drugs of abuse.
Urine pregnancy test (for all female subjects in the study).
- Verify treatment and medical history.
- Monitor and record concurrent medications.
Monitor and record adverse events.
For subjects to continue participating in the study, it was necessary for drug tests (including alcohol and cotinine) to be available and to be negative before dosing. In addition, continued adherence with respect to concurrent treatment and other caveats at the beginning and throughout the study was verified in appropriate documentary sources.
Before the first dose in Period 1, treated subjects were placed in a treatment sequence in which the reference and test treatments were received in a specific order. The treatment sequence was prepared according to a random allocation schedule (RAS) by a biostatistician who was not involved in the evaluation of study results. Randomization was relied upon in this study to enhance the reliability of statistical comparisons between different treatments.
The treatment sequences for this study are shown in Table 26-1
Table No. 26-1
Sequence
The first period
Second period
Third period
Fourth period
O.C
1C
1A
1B
2
1A
O.C
1B
1C
3
1B
1A
1C
O.C
4
1C
1B
O.C
1A
Study procedures:
The study included four periods, in each of which a single dose was administered. There was an interval of seven days between doses in each study period. During each period, therapists were detained at the study site from the day before the administration of study drugs and for 48 hours after the administration of study drugs, and returned to the study site for procedures lasting 72 hours.
In each study period, patients were given one of the test formulations of oxycodone (10 mg) or OxyContin 10 mg (OC) with 240 ml of water, after a 10-hour overnight fast (for fasted state treatments). Patients receiving treatment in a fasted state continued to fast for 4 hours after taking the dose. Therapists receiving food-administered treatments began a standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) 30 minutes before drug administration. Dosing was given to treated subjects 30 minutes after the start of the meal and no food was allowed for at least 4 hours after the dose.
Therapists received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at -12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours for each test formulation or OxyContin dose.
Therapists were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of the study treatment. Therapists remained in the upright position for a minimum of 24 hours.
Clinical laboratory sampling was preceded by fasting (for at least 10 hours). Fasting was not required on study days when samples were not taken.
During the study, adverse events and concurrent treatments were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, respiratory rate) and SPO2 were monitored. Blood samples were obtained to determine plasma oxycodone concentrations from each of the treated subjects at pre-dose and post-dose concentrations of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16. , 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours.
For each sample, 6 ml of venous blood was drawn through an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing the anticoagulant K2EDTA (6 ml drawn - using the K2EDTA Vacutainer vacuum tube set). Oxycodone concentrations in plasma were determined by a reliable tandem method based on the mass spectrometric method through the use of liquid chromatography.
- ECG 12 leads.
- Chemical laboratory evaluations (including biochemistry evaluations [with fasting for at least 10 hours], hematology evaluations, and urinalysis).
- Adverse event evaluations.
- Pregnancy test in serum (for treated females only).
The results of this study are shown in Tables 26-2 to 26-5.
Table No. 26-2: Average pharmacokinetic data for plasma.
Treatments 1A, 1B, 1C and OC (if fed)
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
12
12
12
11
12
12
12
Average
11.3
5.08
122
134
4.22
0.170
0.0833
standard deviation
5.54
2.46
55.3
42.5
0.884
0.0292
0.195
minimum
0.372
1.00
1.13
86.2
3.34
0.114
0
Mediator
10.7
5.00
120
121
3.94
0.177
0
maximum
20.5
10.0
221
223
6.10
0.207
0.500
Geometric mean
8.63
Unavailable
85.8
128
Unavailable
Unavailable
Unavailable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Average
14.2
5.25
133
134
4.37
0.164
0.0833
standard deviation
3.36
1.48
40.2
40.3
0.947
0.0283
0.195
minimum
8.11
3.00
63.7
64.5
3.28
0.0990
0
Mediator
14.2
5.00
126
127
4.22
0.165
0
maximum
18.5
8.00
205
207
7.00
0.211
0.500
Geometric mean
13.8
Not Applicable
127
128
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Average
17.1
4.21
138
139
4.41
0.162
0.0417
standard deviation
4.66
1.21
42.9
42.9
0.843
0.0263
0.144
minimum
11.6
1.50
91.4
92.5
3.43
0.107
0
Mediator
16.5
4.50
122
123
4.03
0.173
0
maximum
27.9
6.00
218
219
6.49
0.202
0.500
Geometric mean
16.5
Not Applicable
133
134
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Average
13.2
3.17
142
143
4.83
0.146
0
standard deviation
3.20
1.85
39.3
39.5
0.702
0.0189
0
minimum
8.85
1.00
95.2
95.9
3.93
0.105
0
Mediator
12.3
2.25
124
125
4.76
0.146
0
maximum
18.1
6.00
218
219
6.59
0.176
0
Geometric mean
12.8
Not Applicable
137
138
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Table No. 26-3: Average pharmacokinetic data for plasma
Processors 1A, 1B, 1C and OC (in fasted state)
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
Average
8.84
4.60
109
111
4.66
0.156
0.0250
standard deviation
2.25
1.90
20.1
20.3
1.26
0.0279
0.112
minimum
4.85
2.00
69.0
69.8
3.56
0.0752
0
Mediator
8.53
5.00
114
114
4.29
0.162
0
maximum
13.2
10.0
138
139
9.22
0.195
0.500
Geometric mean
8.56
Not Applicable
108
109
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
Average
9.97
4.58
115
116
4.67
0.156
0
standard deviation
1.82
1.18
23.8
23.8
1.24
0.0309
0
minimum
6.90
2.00
75.2
76.3
3.53
0.0878
0
Mediator
10.0
5.00
121
122
4.35
0.159
0
maximum
14.1
6.00
152
153
7.90
0.197
0
Geometric mean
9.81
Not Applicable
113
114
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
Average
13.6
3.75
110
111
4.18
0.169
0.0227
standard deviation
3.79
1.38
18.5
18.5
0.594
0.0256
0.107
minimum
8.64
1.00
70.6
71.1
2.92
0.135
0
Mediator
12.9
3.75
112
113
4.13
0.169
0
maximum
23.7
6.00
142
143
5.14
0.237
0.500
Geometric mean
13.2
Not Applicable
108
109
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
z
tlag
(nanog/ml)
(hour)
(nmg/ml)
(nmg/ml)
(hour)
(1 hour)
(hour)
N
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
Average
9.73
2.82
114
115
4.82
0.154
0
standard deviation
1.67
0.960
26.0
26.2
1.41
0.0379
0
minimum
7.38
1.00
76.3
77.8
3.11
0.0839
0
Mediator
9.57
3.00
112
112
4.37
0.159
0
maximum
13.2
5.00
181
183
8.27
0.223
0
Geometric mean
9.60
Not Applicable
112
113
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Table No. 26-4
Statistical results of oxycodone pharmacokinetic measurements:
Bioavailability of Example Tablets 7-1 to 7-3 Tablets for OxyContin 10 mg if taken with food (Contents: full analysis).
Comparison
(test vs. reference)
Cmax
AUCt
Average LS ratio (test/reference)a
90% verification intervalb
Average LS ratio (test/reference)a
90% verification intervalb
1A vs OC
67.5
[47.84، 95.16]
62.6
[39.30، 99.83]
1B vs OC
108.0
[76.59، 152.33]
92.9
[58.31، 148.14]
1C vs OC
129.0
[91.54، 182.07]
97.0
[60.83، 154.52]
a Least squares mean from ANOVA. Log-natural (ln) metric means are calculated by returning ln means to the linear scale, i.e. geometric means; Ratio of metric averages converted to ln-measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert Ln to a linear scale (test = treatment 1A, 1B, 1C; reference = treatment OC); b 90% confirmation interval for the ratio of metric means (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert Ln to linear scale.
Table No. 26-5
Statistical results of oxycodone pharmacokinetic measurements:
Bioavailability of Example Tablets 7-1 to 7-3 Tablets for OxyContin 10 mg in a fasted state (Contents: Full analysis).
Comparison
(test vs. reference)
Cmax
AUCt
Average LS ratio (test/reference)a
90% verification intervalb
Average LS ratio (test/reference)a
Average LS ratio (test/reference)a
1A vs OC
89.5
[82.76، 96.89]
97.0
[92.26، 102.79]
1B vs OC
99.0
[91.33، 107.30]
101.0
[95.42، 106.57]
1C vs OC
133.0
[123.23، 143.86]
96.4
[91.43، 101.68]
a Least squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means are calculated by returning ln means to the linear scale, i.e. geometric means; Ratio of metric averages converted to ln-measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert Ln to a linear scale (test = treatment 1A, 1B, 1C; reference = OC);
In Example 27, the oxycodone HCl tablets from Examples 7-2 and Examples 14-2 through 14-5 containing 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 mg oxycodone HCl, respectively, are subjected to a number of striation tests, using mechanical force mechanical force and chemical extraction to evaluate their tolerance to physical and chemical use.
Test results are compared to control data, and are stated as the percentage in active pharmaceutical ingredient (API) released into intact tablets after in vitro dissolution in Simulated Gastric Fluid (SGF) without enzymes For 45 minutes. This comparison was chosen as a reference point to determine the amount of API present in the body (after approximately 45 minutes) when the product is taken as indicated. Available results for the currently marketed formulation, OxyContinTM, are also shown for comparison.
Five different strength tablets were manufactured (10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg oxycodone HCl, corresponding to Examples 7-2, and Examples 14-2 to 14-5).
All tablet strengths have approximately the same size and weight, so all tests were performed on bracketing tablets in which the API to excipient ratio is the lowest (10 mg, Example 7-2) and the API to excipient ratio is highest. What is possible (40 mg, Example No. 14-5).
In addition, Level 1 tests were performed on medium strength tablets (15, 20 and 30 mg, examples 14-2, 14-3 and 14-4) to evaluate tolerance to physical manipulation and subsequent chemical extraction, when using a mortar. Weed mortar and pestle.
No further testing was performed on these tablets as at higher levels of testing a coffee grinder was used which resulted in distributions with similar particle size and similar amount of API extracted from the milled bracketing tablets (Examples 7-2 and 14-5).
The experimental techniques used in this test are designed to provide procedures to simulate and evaluate common methods of abuse.
In general, four levels of tamper resistance have been defined to give an approximate picture of the relative level of tamper resistance. Several trends have been considered regarding distortion; These trends include mechanical force (imposed to damage the product), availability and toxicity of extraction solvents, length of extraction, and thermal treatment.
Each higher level of tamper resistance represents an increase in the degree of difficulty necessary to successfully tamper a drug product. Definitions of distortion resistance levels, including examples of equipment and reaction materials, are shown in Table 27-1.
Table 27-1: Definitions and examples of testing
the level
the definition
Degree of difficulty
Equipment examples
Examples of reactants
0
The ability to abuse directly without prior preparation
You do not remember
Not Applicable
nothing
Easily misused in a number of ways without a reactant or with an easily obtained reactant
The reactants are directly digestible and the extraction time is shorter
minimum
Crushing tool (hammer, hammer, disc crusher, etc.)
water,
Concentrated spirits (vodka, strong liqueur, etc.), vinegar,
baking soda,
Cooking oil
2
It is easily abused with some additional preparation that requires some planning
The reactants are directly digestible, but they are more harmful, the extraction time is shorter, and heat treatment is applied.
Medium
Tools needed for laboratory preparation, grinding tool (coffee grinder, blending tool), microwave oven
100% ethanol (grain alcohol, everclear alcohol)
Strong acidic and basic solutions.
3
Preparation for misuse requires knowledge of drug chemistry, involves readily available reactants, may require industrial instruments, and involves complex processes (e.g., two-phase extraction)
Some reactants are harmful and not directly digestible, the extraction time and temperature are increased
big
Impact mill
(eg, Fitzmill)
In addition to the solvents mentioned above:
Methanol, ether, isopropanol, acetone, ethyl acetate
Test results:
Standard control data (“taken as indicated”) and description limits:
Dissolution testing on Example 7-2 tablets and Examples 14-2 through 14-5 intact was performed in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 mL simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. Samples were taken 45 minutes after thawing and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). The average results of the triplicate analysis are recorded in Table 27-2 and compared to the equivalent data for OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets.
Table 27-2: Standard results - API released % after 45 minutes
Sample preparation
oxycodone HCl 1% which is released after 45 minutes
OxyContinTM
10 mg
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-2
(15 mg)
Example No. 14-3
(20 mg)
Example No. 14-4
(30 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
None (good disks)
34
19
20
20
18
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
In addition, Table 27-3 contains dissolution specification limits for an hour for each of the tablets being studied. This demonstrates the acceptable range of drug release after 1 hour for all formulations tested in this study. It should be noted that the maximum acceptable endpoint of 1-hour in vitro release of oxycodone HCl from OxyContin 10 mg tablets is 49%.
Table 27-3: Dissolution Description Limits (what is released%)
the product
Limit description of one hour
Example No. 7-2
15-35
Example No. 14-2
15-35
Example No. 14-3
15-35
Example No. 14-4
15-35
Example No. 14-5
15-35
OxyContinTM 10 mg
29-49
First test level:
The first test level included crushing using mortar and pestle and simple extraction.
Level 1 Results - Crushing
After crushing with mortar and pestle in the laboratory, dissolution testing triplicate was performed for each product using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C. As described above for control data. It was not possible to crush the tablets of Example 7-2 using a weed mortar and therefore API release was not increased compared to the control results. Although difficult, it was possible to break the example tablets 14-2 to 14-5 (tablets 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg) into large pieces using a mortar and hand mortar and resulted in little to no powder. This reduction in particle size resulted in a higher API release; However, increased swelling tablet matrix volume, when dissolved in SGF, prevented dose loss as less than half of the API was released after 45 minutes. OxyContinTM tablets were easily converted into powder using mortar and pestle resulting in the release of most of the API. Figure 40 contains representative photographs of crushed tablets. Table 27-4 includes the average results for the percentage of API released after crushing.
Table 27-4: Crushing Results - % API released after 45 minutes
Sample preparation
oxycodone HCl 1% which is released after 45 minutes
OxyContinTM
10 mg
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-2
(15 mg)
Example No. 14-3
(20 mg)
Example No. 14-4
(30 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
Crushed tablets
92
20
41
44
42
43
Standard - intact tablets (45-minute release)
34
19
20
20
18
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
In addition, the tablets of Example 14-5 could not be crushed between two spoons, which indicates that additional tools may be required to crush the tablets. In contrast, OxyContinTM tablets were easily crushed between two spoons.
Results of the first level simple extraction:
The tablets of Example 7-2 and Examples 14-2 through 14-4 were crushed in mortar and pestle and vigorously shaken in a hand shaker, at an angle of 10, for 15 minutes in various solvents at room temperature. As indicated above, the tablets of Example 7-2 were not affected by crushing in mortar and mortar and thus extraction amounts were not increased. Example tablets 14-2 to 14-5 were crushed using a weed mortar before extraction. Because of the increased size of the tablet matrices in the solvents tested, crushed tablets remained resistant to extensive dose elimination, while OxyContinTM tablets released almost all of the API. Table 27-5 contains the average amount of API released in each solvent.
Table 27-5: Results of simple extraction - % API released after 15 minutes
oxycodone HCl 1% released
Crushed tablets in extraction solvent
OxyContinTM
(10 mg)
Example 7.2
(10 mg)
Example 14.2
(15 mg)
Example 14.3
(20 mg)
Example 14.4
(30 mg)
Example 14.5
(40 mg)
water
92
8
32
30
28
51
40% EtOH (v/v)
101
5
24
18
22
40
vinegar
102
11
28
35
41
54
Cooking oil
79
0
2
2
6
0.026 M solution of baking soda
95
6
26
25
29
50
Titration of tablets (45-minute release)
34
19
20
20
18
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
Second level of testing:
The second level of testing included grinding, simulated intravenous (IV) preparation, thermal treatment and extraction.
Level 2 results - grinding:
Example 7-2 and Example 14-5 tablets were ground in a Cuisanart coffee grinder fitted with stainless steel blades (Model DCG-12BC) for one minute. The power output of the coffee grinder (for 1 minute) is determined to be 10.5 kJ. In triplicate, substances equivalent to one dose unit were removed and analyzed by dissolution test using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid (SGF) without enzymes at 37°C, as described above for For standard data control data. After one minute, the milled tablets Example No. 7-2 and Example No. 14-5 were ground to similar particle size distributions resulting in the forces of the two tablets releasing approximately half of the API. OxyContinTM tablets were ground into a mixture of larger pieces and some powder resulting in almost complete API release. Table 27-6 contains the average amount of API released from the ground tablets. As we mentioned previously, the tablets of Example No. 7-2 and 14-5 increase in size and become gelatinous. This phenomenon provides protection against loss of speed. Figure 41 contains representative images of the tablets before and after dissolution.
Table 27-6: Grinding Results - % API released after 45 minutes
oxycodone HCl 1% released
Sample preparation
OxyContin
(10 mg)
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example 14-5 (40 mg)
Crushed tablets
93
47
52
Intact tablet caliber (45 minute release)
34
19
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
Relative dissolution rate in vitro:
To evaluate the relative rate of API release, dissolution samples were collected every five minutes from t = 0 to t = 40 minutes for Example 7-2 tablets (coffee grinder) and crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets (mortar and pestle). The OxyContinTM tablet is most easily and effectively crushed using a mortar and hand mortar. Although approximately half of the API is released from the crushed Example 7-2 tablets over a 45-minute period, it is released at a gradual rate that characterizes a controlled-release product. Loss of doses is not observed. Conversely, dissolving crushed OxyContinTM tablets results in a dose loss within 10 minutes. This is illustrated in Figure 42.
Particle size distribution of milled tablets:
Example 7-2 and 14-5 ground (coffee grinder) and OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets (mortar and hand mortar) were analyzed using a screen to evaluate particle size distribution. The tablets were sieved for 12 minutes using vibration. The sieves used and the corresponding mesh sizes are shown in Table 27-7. As shown in the particle size distribution graphs in Figure 43, 70-80% of the ground tablets of Example 7-2 and 14-5 are larger than 600 micrometers. Large particle sizes are likely to be unsuitable for inhalation. OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets resulted in a distribution of much smaller particle sizes.
Table 27-7: Sieves sizes and corresponding micron size
Sieve number
Size(μm)
30
600
40
425
60
250
80
180
120
125
200
75
325
45
Level 2 results: Intravenous preparation:
Example tablets 7-2 and 14-5 were ground in a coffee grinder (as shown above) and placed on a spoon. OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets were crushed between two spoons. Two milliliters of water were added to each scoop to extract or dissolve the drug product. Example tablets 7-2 and 14-5 become sticky after adding water resulting in a small amount of liquid (<0.3 ml) being drawn into the insulin syringe and analyzed for its API content. Very little API has been extracted. One milliliter extracted contains approximately half the API of crushed OxyContin 10 mg tablets. Table 27-8 contains results for the simulated preparation administered intravenously.
Table 27-8: Simulated IV Results - API Launched %
oxycodone HCl 1% released
Sample preparation
OxyContinTM
(10 mg)
Example 7-2 (10 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
Simulated IV preparation
49
4
Standard - intact tablets (45 minutes of release)
34
19
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
Results of the second level of thermal treatment:
Heat treatment was performed in a microwave oven; However, the test was unsuccessful in small volumes of water. It was not possible to include the tablet material Example No. 7-2 and 14-5 in 10 20 ml of boiling water, so the amount of water was increased to 100 ml. After 3 minutes in a high power 800 W microwave oven (GE Model JE835), the remaining liquid was analyzed for its API content. In addition, extraction was evaluated in a small volume of boiling water by adding 10 ml of boiling water to a vial containing milled tablets. The vial was shaken vigorously for 15 minutes. As shown in Table 27-9, after applying thermal treatment, the crushed tablets regained the dose-dumping properties that led to complete dose dumping. The microwave experiment was not performed on crushed Oxycontin tablets; However, comparative data from an experiment from a boiling water experiment are shown.
Table 27-9: Heat Treatment Results - API Released %
oxycodone HCl 1% released
Sample preparation
OxyContin
(10 mg)
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
Crushed tablets in 100 ml of hot water (microwave for 3 minutes)
Not Applicable
44
52
Crushed tablets with 10 ml of hot water (shaking for 15 minutes)
89
58
61
Standard intact tablets (45-minute release)
34
19
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
Results of the second level of extraction:
Examples 7-2 and 14-5 were milled tablets in a coffee mill (as described above) and then shaken for 15 minutes in various solvents at room temperature. OxyContinTM tablets are crushed using mortar and pestle. Table 27-10 contains the average amount of API released in each solvent. Milled tablets remained resistant to complete dose loss in a number of solvents.
Table 27-10: Extraction Results - % API released after 15 minutes
oxycodone HCl 1% released
Ground tablets using extraction solvent
OxyContin
(10 mg)
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
100% EtOH
96
53
48
HCl0.1p
97
45
51
NaOH0.2p
16
27
17
Standard intact tablets (release after 45 minutes)
34
19
19
1 As for what is written on the card.
Third level of testing:
The third level of testing involved testing extraction for 60 minutes at room temperature (RT) and 50°C.
Results of the third level, advanced extraction (RT, 50 m):
Tablets 7-2 and 14-5 were ground in a coffee mill (as described above) and then shaken vigorously for 60 minutes in various solvents at room temperature. In addition, the ground tablets were extracted in several solvents held at 50°C for 60 minutes using a heated water bath. Stir bars were placed in each flask to stir the liquid. After one hour of extraction the tablets still retained some of the metered action properties that provided protection against complete loss of the dose. Extraction at higher temperatures is not significantly more effective because of the increased solubility of the tablet matrix at higher temperatures in most solvents tested. In Table 27-11, the released amounts for Example Tablets 7-2 and 14-5 are compared to extraction of crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets for up to 15 minutes.
Table 27-11: Advanced Extraction Results - % API Released After 60 Minutes
The tablets are ground using an extraction solvent
oxycodone1 released (RT) %
oxycodone1 released (50m)%
*OxyContin
(10 mg)
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
*OxyContin
10 mg
Example No. 7-2
(10 mg)
Example No. 14-5
(40 mg)
40% ethanol (v/v)
101
55
56
N/A
61
65
100% ethanol
96
66
61
78
67
Cooking oil
79
2
4
7
4
HCl0.1p
97
58
62
62
69
NaOH0.2p
16
38
35
41
17
70% isopropanol (v/v)
97
48
35
49
69
Acetone
60
37
38
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Methanol
92
71
82
72
61
Ethyl Acetate
83
25
5
39
30
ether
78
10
2
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Standard intact tablets (release after 45 minutes)
34
19
19
34
19
19
1 As for what is written on the card; * Data for OxyContin tablets after 15 minutes for comparison.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test treatment: One tablet from Example No. 14-1 (oxycodoneHCl 10 mg).
Reference treatment *OC treatment: one OxyContin 10 mg tablet.
Both treatments were administered orally with 8 ounces (240 mL) of water as a single dose if taken with food.
Because this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was given to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Selection of treating individuals:
The selection procedures were performed as in Example 26.
Individuals who met the inclusion criteria as described in Example 26 were included in the study, except that section 11 of the exclusion criteria of this study states “refusal to abstain from food for 4 hours after administration of study drugs and abstain from caffeine.” Or xanthine completely during each confinement.
Subjects who met all inclusion criteria but none of the exclusion criteria were included in the study.
It was expected that approximately 84 people would be subjected to the study, with a target of 76 people to complete the study.
Procedures for entering the study:
Entry procedures were performed on day 1 of period 1 and at entry into each period as described in Example 26. Predose laboratory samples (day 1, period 1 only) were collected (based on hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis). After measuring vital signs and SPO2 after fasting overnight (10 hours).
Before the first dose in Period 1, subjects were assigned a treatment sequence according to a random allocation schedule (RAS) as shown in Example 26. The treatment sequence for this study is shown in Table 28-1.
Table No. 28-1
The first period
Second period
Sequence
Processing
One OxyContin 10 mg tablet
One of 14-1 tablets
2
One tablet from Example No. 14-1
One OxyContin 10 mg tablet
Study procedures:
The study included two periods, each with a single dose. There was an interval of at least six days between doses in each study period. During each period, subjects were detained at the study site from the day before study drugs were administered until 48 hours after study drugs were administered, and subjects were returned to the study site for procedures lasting 72 hours.
In each study period, after a 10-hour overnight fast, subjects were fed a standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) before giving Ex. 14-1 or OxyContin 10 mg formula tablets with 240 mL of water 30 minutes apart. . No food was allowed for at least 4 hours after the dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 25 mg tablets at -12, 0, and 12 hours relative to dose formulation Example 14-1 or OxyContin.
Therapists were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of the Example 14-1 or OxyContin formula. Therapists remained in the upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required on non-dose days of the study.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiratory rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples were obtained to determine the concentrations of oxycodone in the plasma from each of the treated people at the concentration before the dose and after the dose for a period of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12. , 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours in each period.
For each sample, 6 ml of venous blood was drawn through an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing the anticoagulant K2EDTA. Oxycodone concentrations in plasma were determined using liquid chromatography and the mass spectrometric method.
The procedures for completing the study were carried out as described in Example No. 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 28-8.
28-2 Statistical results of oxycodone pharmacokinetic measurements:
Bioavailability of Example 14-1 formulation for OxyContin 10 mg
In case of eating food (Contents: full analysis)
a LS average
Test/reference c
90% confirmation interval d
Measurement
N
(Experimental)b
N
(Reference)b
Cmax(nm/ml)
79
13.9
81
13.3
105
(101.06 ؛ 108.51)
AUCt (nanog*h/ml)
79
138
81
145
95.7
(93.85 ؛ 97.68)
AUCinf (nm*h/ml)
79
139
81
146
95.6
(93.73 ؛ 97.53)
a Least squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log means (ln) metric means are calculated by returning ln means to the linear scale, i.e. geometric means; b test=Disk Example 14-1; Reference = OxyContin tablet. Ratio metric means converted to ln measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the Ln ratio to a linear scale.
b90% confidence interval for the ratio of metric averages (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the certainty limits Ln to the linear scale.
The results show that Example 14-1 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin 10 mg tablets when consumed with food.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test treatment: One tablet from Example No. 14-1 (oxycodoneHCl 10 mg).
Reference treatment: One OxyContin 10 mg tablet.
Both treatments were administered orally with 8 ounces (240 mL) of water as a single dose in a fasted state.
Because this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize adverse events associated with opioids.
Selection of treating individuals:
The selection procedures were performed as in Example 26.
Individuals who met the inclusion criteria as described in Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to exclusion criteria as shown in Example 26.
Subjects who met all inclusion criteria but none of the exclusion criteria were included in the study. It was expected that approximately 84 people would be subjected to the study, with a target of 76 people to complete the study.
Procedures for entering the study:
Entry procedures were performed on day 1 of period 1 and at entry into each period as described in Example 26. Laboratory samples were collected for predose (day 1, period 1 only) (based on hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis). After measuring vital signs and SPO2 after overnight fasting (10 hours).
Before the first dose in Period 1, subjects were assigned a treatment sequence according to a random allocation schedule (RAS) as shown in Example 26. The treatment sequence for this study is shown in Table 29-1.
Table No. 29-1
The first period
Second period
Sequence
Processing
One OxyContin 10 mg tablet
One tablet from Example No. 14-1
2
One tablet from Example No. 14-1
One OxyContin 10 mg tablet
Study procedures:
The study included two periods, each with a single dose. There was an interval of at least six days between doses in each study period. During each period, subjects were detained at the study site from the day before study drugs were administered until 48 hours after study drugs were administered, and subjects were returned to the study site for procedures lasting 72 hours.
In each study period, subjects were given Ex. 14-1 tablets or OxyContin 10 mg with 40 ml of water, after a 10-hour overnight fast. Therapists continued to fast from food for at least 4 hours after giving the dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 25 mg tablets at -12, 0, and 12 hours relative to dose formulation Example 14-1 or OxyContin.
Therapists were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of the Example 14-1 or OxyContin formula. Therapists remained in the upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Clinical laboratory sampling (on the first day) was preceded by fasting (at least 10 hours) from food (water is not included in this). Fasting was not required on non-dose days of the study.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiratory rate) and SpO2 were monitored.
Blood samples were obtained to determine plasma oxycodone concentrations from each of the treated subjects at pre-dose and post-dose concentrations of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16. , 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours in each period.
For each sample, 6 ml of venous blood was drawn through an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing the anticoagulant K2EDTA. Oxycodone concentrations in plasma were determined using liquid chromatography and the mass spectrometric method.
The procedures for completing the study were carried out as described in Example No. 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 29-2.
Table No. 29-2:
Statistical results for oxycodone pharmacokinetic metrics:
Bioavailability of Example 14-1 formulation for OxyContin 10 mg
In the fasted state (Contents: full analysis)
a LS average
Test/reference c
90% confirmation interval d
Measurement
N
(Experimental)b
N
(Reference)b
Cmax(nm/ml)
81
9.36
81
9.15
102
(99.35، 105.42)
AUCt (nanog*h/ml)
81
107
81
109
98.3
(95.20، 101.48)
AUCinf (nm*h/ml)
81
108
81
110
98.0
(94.94، 101.19)
a least squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means are calculated by returning ln means to a linear scale, i.e. geometric means;
b test=Disk Example 14-1; Reference = OxyContin 10 mg tablet.
Ratio metric means converted to ln measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the Ln ratio to a linear scale.
d90% Confirmation interval for the ratio of metric averages (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the certainty limits Ln to the linear scale.
The results show that Example 14-1 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin 10 mg tablets in a fasted state.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test treatment: One tablet from Example No. 14-5 (oxycodoneHCl 40 mg).
Reference treatment: One OxyContin 40 mg tablet.
Both treatments were administered orally with 8 ounces (240 mL) of water as a single dose in a fed state.
Because this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize adverse events associated with opioids.
Selection of treated individuals subject selection:
The selection procedures were performed as in Example 26.
Individuals who met the inclusion criteria as described in Example 26 were included in the study.
Potential subjects were excluded from the study in accordance with the exclusion criteria as described in Example 26, except that item 11 of the study exclusion criteria states “refusal to abstain from food for 4 hours after administration of study drugs and to abstain from caffeine or xanthine independently.” Completely during each period of confinement.”
Subjects who met all inclusion criteria but none of the exclusion criteria were included in the study. It was expected that approximately 84 people would be subjected to the study, with a target of 76 people to complete the study.
Procedures for entering the study:
Entry procedures were performed on day 1 of period 1 and at entry into each period as described in Example 26. Laboratory samples were collected for predose (day 1, period 1 only) (based on hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis). After measuring vital signs and SPO2 after fasting for a minimum of 4 hours.
Before the first dose in Period 1, subjects were assigned to the sequence of treatments according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) as shown in Example 26. The sequence of treatments for this study is shown in Table 30-1.
Table No. 30-1
The first period
Second period
Sequence
Processing
One OxyContin 40 mg tablet
One tablet from Example No. 14-5
2
One tablet from Example No. 14-5
One OxyContin 40 mg tablet
Study procedures:
The study included two periods, each with a single dose. There was an interval of at least six days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were detained at the study site from the day before study drugs were administered until 48 hours after study drugs were administered, and subjects were returned to the study site for procedures lasting 72 hours.
In each study period, after an overnight fast for 10 hours, subjects ate a standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) before being given Formula 14-5 or OxyContin 40 mg with 240 mL of water. Food for at least 4 hours after dose.
Therapists received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at -12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours relative to the dosages of the example formula No. 14-5 or OxyContin.
Therapists were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of the study treatment. Therapists remained in the upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required on study days when no doses were administered.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, respiratory rate) and SpO2 were monitored.
Blood samples were obtained to determine plasma oxycodone concentrations from each of the treated subjects at pre-dose and post-dose concentrations of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16. , 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours of each period.
For each sample, 6 ml of venous blood was drawn through an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing the anticoagulant K2EDTA. Oxycodone concentrations in plasma were determined using liquid chromatography and the mass spectrometric method.
The procedures for completing the study were carried out as described in Example No. 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 30-2.
Table No. 30-2:
Statistical results of oxycodone pharmacokinetic measurements:
Bioavailability of the formula of Example 14-5 for OxyContin 40 mg
In case of eating food (Contents: full analysis)
a LS average
Test/reference c
90% confirmation interval d
Measurement
N
(Experimental)b
N
referencec
Cmax(nm/ml)
76
59.8
80
59.9
99.9
(95.40، 104.52)
AUCt (nanog*h/ml)
76
514
80
556
92.5
(90.01، 94.99)
AUCinf (nm*h/ml)
76
516
80
558
92.4
(90.00، 94.96)
a least squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means are calculated by converting ln means to a linear scale, i.e. geometric means;
b test=Disk Example 14-5; Reference = OxyContin 40 mg tablet.
Ratio metric means converted to ln measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the Ln ratio to a linear scale.
d90% Verification interval for metric means (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the certainty limits Ln to the linear scale.
The results show that Example 14-5 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin 40 mg tablets when taken with food.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test treatment: One tablet from Example No. 14-5 (oxycodoneHCl 40 mg).
Reference treatment: One OxyContin 40 mg tablet.
Both treatments were administered orally with 8 ounces (240 mL) of water as a single dose in a fasted state.
Because this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist agent naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize adverse events associated with opioids.
Selection of treating individuals:
The selection procedures were performed as in Example 26.
Individuals who met the inclusion criteria as described in Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to exclusion criteria as shown in Example 26.
Subjects who met all inclusion criteria but none of the exclusion criteria were included in the study. It was expected that approximately 84 people would be subjected to the study, with a target of 76 people to complete the study.
Procedures for entering the study:
Entry procedures were performed on day 1 of period 1 and at entry into each period as described in Example 26. Laboratory samples were collected for predose (day 1, period 1 only) (based on SPO2 hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis). ) After measuring vital signs and SPO2 after fasting for a minimum of 4 hours.
Before the first dose in Period 1, subjects were assigned a treatment sequence according to a random allocation schedule (RAS) as shown in Example 26. The treatment sequence for this study is shown in Table 31-1.
Table No. 31-1
The first period
Second period
Sequence
Processing
One OxyContin 40 mg tablet
One tablet from Example No. 14-5
2
One tablet from Example No. 14-5
One OxyContin 40 mg tablet
Study procedures:
The study included two periods, each with a single dose. There was an interval of at least six days between doses in each study period. During each period, subjects were detained at the study site from the day before study drugs were administered until 48 hours after study drugs were administered, and subjects were returned to the study site for procedures lasting 72 hours.
In each study period, patients were given Example 14-5 tablets or OxyContin 40 mg with 240 ml of water, after a 10-hour fasting period at night. Therapists continued to fast for at least 4 hours after taking the dose.
Therapists received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at -12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours for the Example 14-5 formulation or OxyContin dose.
Therapists were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of Example 14-5 or OxyContin. Therapists remained in the upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required for days when no doses were administered.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, respiratory rate) and SpO2 were monitored.
Blood samples were obtained to determine plasma oxycodone concentrations from each of the treated subjects at pre-dose and post-dose concentrations of 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16. , 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours.
For each sample, 6 ml of venous blood was drawn through an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing the anticoagulant K2EDTA. Oxycodone concentrations in plasma were determined using liquid chromatography and the mass spectrometric method.
Procedures were taken to complete the study as described in Example 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 31-2.
Table No. 31-2
Statistical results of oxycodone pharmacokinetic measurements
Bioavailability of the formula of Example 14-5 for OxyContin 40 mg
In the state of fasting (Contents: Complete analysis)
a LS average
Test/reference c
90% confirmation interval d
Measurement
N
(Experimental)b
N
(Reference)b
Cmax(nm/ml)
85
46.1
83
47.7
96.6
(92.80، 100.56)
AUCt (nanog*h/ml)
85
442
83
463
95.5
(92.93، 98.18)
AUCinf (nm*h/ml)
85
444
82
468
94.8
(92.42، 97.24)
a least squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means are calculated by converting ln means to a linear scale, i.e. geometric means;
b test=Disk Example 14-5; Jumia = OxyContin 40 mg tablet.
Ratio metric means converted to ln measurements (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the Ln ratio to a linear scale.
d90% Confirmation interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percentage). Reconvert the certainty limits Ln to linear scale.
The results show that example tablets No. 14-5 are bioequivalent to bioequivalent OxyContin 40 mg tablets in a fasted state.
The scope of the present invention should not be limited to the specific embodiments disclosed in examples that are intended to illustrate certain aspects of the invention, and any functionally equivalent embodiments are within the scope of this invention. In fact, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art many of the modifications that can be made to the invention in addition to the modifications described and described herein that are within the scope of the attached claims.
A number of references are cited, and they are included in their entirety here by reference for all purposes.
Contents112
4 sheets
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4
Every citation, both ways
| Document | Relation | Office |
|---|---|---|
| US20050031546 | Cites | United States of America |
| WO2005016313 | Cites | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) |
| WO2005102286 | Cites | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) |
424 members in 42 offices
Priority claims5
| Document | Office | Kind | Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| 60840244 | United States of America | – | |
| 84024406 | United States of America | P | |
| 84024406 | United States of America | P | |
| 60840244 | – | – | – |
| US20060840244P | – | – | – |
Members424
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| CL2007002485A1 | Chile | A1 | |
| AU2007287341A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| CA2661573A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| CA2707204A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| WO2008023261A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| EP1897545A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| DE202007011825U1 | Germany | U1 | |
| PE20080765A1 | Peru | A1 | |
| TW200824722A | Taiwan Province of China | A | |
| AR062511A1 | Argentina | A1 | |
| HK1118225A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1118225A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| AP2009004770A0 | African Regional Intellectual Property Organization (ARIPO) | A0 | |
| MX2009002023A | Mexico | A | |
| US2009081290A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| KR20090045381A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| CR10691A | Costa Rica | A | |
| EP2070538A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| DOP2009000026A | Dominican Republic | A | |
| EP2080514A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP2082742A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| PE20091184A1 | Peru | A1 | |
| EA200900343A1 | Eurasian Patent Organization (EAPO) | A1 | |
| EP1897545B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| MA30766B1 | Morocco | B1 | |
| AT444070T | Austria | T | |
| ATE444070T1 | Austria | T1 | |
| DE602007002596D1 | Germany | D1 | |
| CN101583360A | China | A | |
| PT1897545E | Portugal | E | |
| IL197214A0 | Israel | A0 | |
| IL197214D0 | Israel | D0 | |
| ZA200900755B | South Africa | B | |
| JP2010501543A | Japan | A | |
| SI1897545T1 | Slovenia | T1 | |
| DK1897545T3 | Denmark | T3 | |
| HK1132189A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1132189A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| PL1897545T3 | Poland | T3 | |
| HRP20090688T1 | Croatia | T1 | |
| ES2334466T3 | Spain | T3 | |
| HK1133192A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1133192A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| CO6160317A2 | Colombia | A2 | |
| TN2009000059A1 | Tunisia | A1 | |
| HK1138498A | Hong Kong, China | A | |
| HK1138498A1 | Hong Kong, China | A1 | |
| CA2661573C | Canada | C | |
| RS51162B | Serbia | B | |
| GT200900023A | Guatemala | A | |
| EP2070538B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| EP2082742B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| AT489953T | Austria | T | |
| AT489954T | Austria | T | |
| ATE489953T1 | Austria | T1 | |
| ATE489954T1 | Austria | T1 | |
| DE602007010963D1 | Germany | D1 | |
| DE602007010974D1 | Germany | D1 | |
| AT11571U1 | Austria | U1 | |
| EP2080514B1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | B1 | |
| PT2070538E | Portugal | E | |
| PT2082742E | Portugal | E | |
| EP2292229A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP2292230A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| AT499101T | Austria | T | |
| ATE499101T1 | Austria | T1 | |
| DK2070538T3 | Denmark | T3 | |
| DK2082742T3 | Denmark | T3 | |
| HRP20110130T1 | Croatia | T1 | |
| SI2070538T1 | Slovenia | T1 | |
| SI2082742T1 | Slovenia | T1 | |
| DE602007012747D1 | Germany | D1 | |
| EP2311459A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| ES2357376T3 | Spain | T3 | |
| HRP20110147T1 | Croatia | T1 | |
| TWI341213B | Taiwan Province of China | B | |
| ES2358066T3 | Spain | T3 | |
| DK2080514T3 | Denmark | T3 | |
| PT2080514E | Portugal | E | |
| PL2070538T3 | Poland | T3 | |
| PL2082742T3 | Poland | T3 | |
| SI2080514T1 | Slovenia | T1 | |
| ES2361721T3 | Spain | T3 | |
| HRP20110375T1 | Croatia | T1 | |
| EP2343071A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| SA07280459B1 | Saudi Arabia | B1 | |
| SA2709B1This record | Saudi Arabia | B1 | |
| AU2007287341B2 | Australia | B2 | |
| RS51591B | Serbia | B | |
| AU2011213804A1 | Australia | A1 | |
| PL2080514T3 | Poland | T3 | |
| DOP2011000255A | Dominican Republic | A | |
| UA96306C2 | Ukraine | C2 | |
| ME01187B | Montenegro | B | |
| RS51664B | Serbia | B | |
| RS51678B | Serbia | B | |
| KR20110119847A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| EP2384754A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP2399579A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| EP2399580A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 |
Numbers
- Publication
- 2709
- Publication, DOCDB
- 2709
- Publication, EPODOC
- SA2709
- Application
- 7280459
- Application, DOCDB
- 07280459
- Application, EPODOC
- SA20070280459
Titles2
- English
- Tamper Resistant Oral Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms Comprising an Opioid Analgesic
- Arabic
- أشكال جرعة صيدلانية للتناول عن طريق الفم مقاومة للعبث تشتمل على مسكن شبه أفيوني
Classification
- CPC, 47
- A61K9/0002
- A61K31/485
- A61K9/1641
- A61K9/2086
- A61K9/28
- A61K9/2031
- A61K9/2866
- A61K9/2072
- A61K9/2013
- A61K9/2054
- A61K9/2095
- A61K9/2853
- A61P25/00
- A61P25/04
- A61P29/00
- A61P29/02
- A61K9/16
- A61K47/34
- A61K9/2018
- A61K9/2893
- A61J3/06
- A61K9/209
- A61K45/06
- A61K47/10
- A61K9/2077
- A61J3/10
- B29C43/003
- A61J3/005
- B29C37/0025
- B29C43/52
- B29K2071/02
- A61K9/0053
- B29B7/88
- B29C35/045
- B29C2035/046
- B29K2105/0035
- B29B7/02
- B29C35/16
- B29C43/02
- B29C71/009
- B29C2035/1658
- B29L2031/753
- A61K9/284
- A61K9/2027
- B29K2105/251
- B29C71/00
- B29K2995/0088
- IPC, 2
- A61K9 22
- A61K31 485
